CX-Server PLC Tools Release 3.1

CX-Server PLC Tools Release 3.1
CX-Server
PLC Tools
Release 3.1
OMRON
CX-Server PLC Tools
Notice
OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for
the purposes described in this manual.
The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed the
information provided in them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to the product.
DANGER
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death
or serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death
or serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.
Caution
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor
or moderate injury, or property damage.
OMRON Product References
All OMRON products are capitalised in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalised when it refers to an
OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.
The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Logic Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything
else.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page (i)
OMRON
CX-Server PLC Tools
Visual Aids
The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information.
Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.
1, 2, 3…
Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists etc.
Represents a shortcut on the Toolbar to one of the options available on the menu of
the same window.
Other manual conventions are as follows:
•
Windows-based applications provide users with a number of different ways to perform one operation.
These are normally: from the application menu bar; using icons on a Toolbar; using keyboard shortcuts;
using the right-mouse button to display a context-sensitive menu; dragging and dropping. Whilst
recognising this, the manual provides user instructions employing the Toolbar and right-mouse button only.
Use of the application menu bar or keyboard shortcuts are only included if no such alternatives exist.
•
Access to the CX-Server middleware is normally via other software applications, such as CX-Programmer
or CX-Protocol. This is noted in the manual by the term “invoking application”.
•
This manual refers to two distinct types of project: CX-Server projects and application projects. A CXServer project is defined in this manual. An application project is defined by the software application
invoking CX-Server.
 OMRON, 2005
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in
any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of OMRON.
All copyright and trademarks acknowledged.
No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because
OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is
subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual.
Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for
damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page (ii)
OMRON
CX-Server PLC Tools
About this Manual
This manual describes the CX-Server application and its ability to control and monitor a range of OMRON
PLCs. It does not provide detailed information concerning the PLCs themselves, for this information the
commercial manual for the device must be consulted.
This manual contains the following chapters:
♦
Chapter 1 Technical Specification. This chapter describes CX-Server in general terms and introduces the
user to the relationship between CX-Server and associated products. It also provides details of the
operating environment, minimum configuration and installation procedures necessary for the satisfactory
operation of CX-Server.
♦ Chapter 2 PLC Memory Component. This chapter describes the PLC Memory Component and its ability
to allow the user to view, edit and monitor PLC Data Areas, bits and symbols.
♦ Chapter 3 IO Table Component. This chapter describes the IO Table Component and its ability to edit
PLC IO Table and SIOU Settings on a PLC.
♦ Chapter 4 PLC Setup Component. This chapter describes the PLC Setup Component and the procedures
involved in the configuration of PLC settings.
♦ Chapter 5 Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor Component. This chapter describes the Data Trace/Time
Chart Monitor Component and the procedures involved when viewing Data Trace and Time Chart
Monitoring information in either Histogram or Trend Graph mode.
♦ Chapter 6 PLC Error Component. This chapter describes the PLC Error Component and the procedures
involved in reading and clearing PLC CPU errors, error log entries and messages.
♦ Chapter 7 Memory Card Component. This chapter describes the Memory Card Component and the
procedures required to format, access and edit a PLCs memory card/compact flash and to transfer data
between the computer or PLC and memory card/compact flash.
♦ Chapter 8 CX-Net Network Configuration Tool. This chapter describes the procedures for establishing
communications between PLCs across a network and ensuring that information is routed correctly to the
target devices.
♦ Chapter 9 PLC Clock Tool. This chapter describes the PLC Clock Tool and the procedures involved when
adjusting the PLC clock.
♦ Chapter 10 Data Links. This chapter describes how the Data Link Editor enables a PLC to be configured
so that it can participate in one, or more automatic data sharing schemes, over SYSMAC LINK and
Controller Link networks, without the need for special programming.
♦ Chapter 11 Routing Tables. This chapter describes how Routing tables allow networked PLCs to be
configured so that they can communicate with each other via gateways; across remote networks.
♦ Appendix A Network Availability. The tables in this appendix indicate the network available to each PLC
device group. FinsGateway has no network availability and is not described.
♦ Appendix B PLC Memory Area. The tables in this appendix provide memory area details for each device
group.
♦ Appendix C Toolbars and Keyboard Shortcuts. The tables in this appendix summarize the toolbars and
keyboard shortcuts available from each component tool.
A Glossary of Terms and Index are also provided.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page (iii)
OMRON
CX-Server PLC Tools
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS.................................................................................. iv
CHAPTER 1 Technical Specification............................................................... 1
CX-Server PLC Tools Software............................................................................................................................ 1
About this Manual................................................................................................................................................. 1
CX-Server 3.1 PLC Tools: New Features ............................................................................................................. 2
System Requirements............................................................................................................................................ 2
Communications Requirements ............................................................................................................................ 2
Installation............................................................................................................................................................. 2
Starting CX-Server PLC Tools ............................................................................................................................. 3
Help and How to Access it.................................................................................................................................... 3
Help Topics..................................................................................................................................................... 3
Technical Support ................................................................................................................................................. 4
CHAPTER 2 PLC Memory Component.......................................................... 7
PLC Data Area ...................................................................................................................................................... 8
Editing Data .................................................................................................................................................... 8
PC to PLC Communications ........................................................................................................................... 8
Monitoring Data............................................................................................................................................ 10
Clearing and Filling Data Areas.................................................................................................................... 11
PLC Address Area............................................................................................................................................... 12
Monitoring .................................................................................................................................................... 12
Forced Settings ............................................................................................................................................. 13
PLC Memory Management................................................................................................................................. 14
PLC Memory Preferences ................................................................................................................................... 15
CHAPTER 3 IO Table Component................................................................ 17
I/O Table Window Variations ............................................................................................................................. 17
Auto-selection of the I/O Table Window...................................................................................................... 17
Distinguishing between the CS/CJ/CP and C/CV I/O Table Windows ........................................................ 18
I/O Table Window Functions........................................................................................................................ 18
Special I/O Unit and CPU Bus Unit Settings ...................................................................................................... 19
CPS File Overview ....................................................................................................................................... 19
Specialized Tool Startup Overview (Supported when CX-Programmer Is Installed from CX-One).................. 19
Displaying an I/O Table ...................................................................................................................................... 19
Displaying the CS/CJ/CP I/O Table Window............................................................................................... 19
Displaying the C/CV I/O Table Window...................................................................................................... 20
Unit Settings........................................................................................................................................................ 21
Settings for the CS/CJ/CP I/O Table Window.............................................................................................. 21
Settings for the C/CV Series I/O Table Window .......................................................................................... 24
Unit Setup ..................................................................................................................................................... 26
Software Switches......................................................................................................................................... 26
Displaying Unit Error Log in the IO Table ......................................................................................................... 28
IO Table Management......................................................................................................................................... 29
PC to PLC Communications ............................................................................................................................... 29
Transfer an IO Table from a PLC ................................................................................................................. 29
Transfer an IO Table to a PLC...................................................................................................................... 29
Comparing an IO Table ................................................................................................................................ 30
Starting Specialized Support Tools ..................................................................................................................... 30
PLC Specific Features......................................................................................................................................... 32
Hot Swapping ............................................................................................................................................... 32
Setting Rack Start Addresses ........................................................................................................................ 33
Units Profile Information .............................................................................................................................. 33
CHAPTER 4 PLC Setup Component ............................................................ 35
CS/CJ/CP-Series PLC Settings ........................................................................................................................... 35
PLC Startup................................................................................................................................................... 35
Settings ......................................................................................................................................................... 36
Timings ......................................................................................................................................................... 36
CX-Server PLC Tools Page (iv)
OMRON
CX-Server PLC Tools
SIOU Refresh................................................................................................................................................ 37
Unit Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 37
Host Link Port............................................................................................................................................... 37
Peripheral Port .............................................................................................................................................. 37
Peripheral Service ......................................................................................................................................... 37
Duplex Settings............................................................................................................................................. 38
CV-Series PLC Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 39
PLC Startup................................................................................................................................................... 39
Error Log ...................................................................................................................................................... 40
Execution Controls ....................................................................................................................................... 40
Host Link Port............................................................................................................................................... 41
IO Refresh..................................................................................................................................................... 41
Address Enable ............................................................................................................................................. 41
PLC Timings................................................................................................................................................. 41
Hold .............................................................................................................................................................. 41
C-Series PLC Settings......................................................................................................................................... 42
PLC Startup................................................................................................................................................... 42
Cycle Time.................................................................................................................................................... 43
Interrupt/Refresh ........................................................................................................................................... 43
P .................................................................................................................................................................... 43
Error Settings ................................................................................................................................................ 44
High Speed Counters .................................................................................................................................... 44
Device Net .................................................................................................................................................... 45
PC to PLC Communications ............................................................................................................................... 45
Uploading PLC Settings ............................................................................................................................... 45
Downloading PLC Settings........................................................................................................................... 45
Comparing PLC Settings .............................................................................................................................. 46
CHAPTER 5 Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor Component ....................... 47
Sampling Ranges................................................................................................................................................. 47
CS/CJ-series PLC Sampling Range .............................................................................................................. 48
CV-series PLC Sampling Range................................................................................................................... 48
C-series PLC Sampling Range...................................................................................................................... 48
Setting Monitoring Conditions............................................................................................................................ 48
Managing the Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor................................................................................................... 49
Saving Data Trace Settings ................................................................................................................................. 50
Retrieving Data Trace/Time Monitor Settings .................................................................................................... 50
Displaying a Data Trace/Time Chart................................................................................................................... 50
SYSWIN Data Trace and Time Chart Monitor Files .......................................................................................... 52
CHAPTER 6 PLC Error Component ............................................................ 53
Errors................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Error Log............................................................................................................................................................. 54
Messages ............................................................................................................................................................. 54
Error Log Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 54
Time Monitoring........................................................................................................................................... 54
Manually Updating the Error Log................................................................................................................. 55
Customising the Layout of the Error Log ..................................................................................................... 55
Enabling and Disabling the Error Log .......................................................................................................... 55
Overwriting Error Log Entries...................................................................................................................... 55
Displaying the Error Log .............................................................................................................................. 56
CHAPTER 7 Memory Card Component....................................................... 57
Memory Card Operation ..................................................................................................................................... 57
Memory Card Display......................................................................................................................................... 58
Memory Card Properties............................................................................................................................... 59
Transferring Data between the PLC and Memory Card ............................................................................... 59
Possible Memory Card Errors ............................................................................................................................. 59
CHAPTER 8 CX-Server Network Configuration Tool (CX-Net)............... 61
CX-Net and CX-Server Projects ......................................................................................................................... 62
Creating a New CX-Server Project............................................................................................................... 62
CX-Server PLC Tools Page (v)
OMRON
CX-Server PLC Tools
Opening an Existing CX-Server Project ....................................................................................................... 62
Adding a Device ........................................................................................................................................... 62
Editing a Device List .................................................................................................................................... 63
PLC Settings ....................................................................................................................................................... 63
Opening a PLC.............................................................................................................................................. 63
Closing a PLC............................................................................................................................................... 63
Configuring a PLC’s System Settings .......................................................................................................... 64
Scanning for PLC Connections..................................................................................................................... 64
Dragging Device Information into a CX-Server Project............................................................................... 64
Displaying PLC Device Information ............................................................................................................ 64
Setting the PLC Mode................................................................................................................................... 65
Clearing PLC Errors ..................................................................................................................................... 65
Creating an IO Table..................................................................................................................................... 65
Displaying the PLC Unit Status .................................................................................................................... 65
Testing the Network Connection .................................................................................................................. 66
Communications Unit Setup ......................................................................................................................... 66
SYSMAC LINK Settings .................................................................................................................................... 66
Network Status.............................................................................................................................................. 66
Network Settings........................................................................................................................................... 66
Controller Link Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 67
Network Status.............................................................................................................................................. 67
Network Settings........................................................................................................................................... 67
Routing Tables .................................................................................................................................................... 67
Data Link............................................................................................................................................................. 67
Data Link Setup ............................................................................................................................................ 68
O ................................................................................................................................................................... 69
CHAPTER 9 PLC Clock Tool ........................................................................ 71
CHAPTER 10 Data Links ............................................................................... 73
What Are Data Links?......................................................................................................................................... 73
Overview....................................................................................................................................................... 73
User Interface Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 75
Datalink Component ..................................................................................................................................... 75
Manually Setting Data Links............................................................................................................................... 78
Procedure through Data Link Startup ........................................................................................................... 79
Creating Data Link Tables ............................................................................................................................ 79
System Configuration Example .................................................................................................................... 81
Creating Data Link Tables Offline................................................................................................................ 83
Procedure Using Setup Example................................................................................................................... 94
Checking Data Link Tables .......................................................................................................................... 96
Printing Data Link Tables............................................................................................................................. 96
Saving Data Link Tables............................................................................................................................... 97
Creating, Reading, and Writing CSV Files (Saving) .................................................................................... 97
Connecting Online ...................................................................................................................................... 102
Reading and Transferring Data Link Tables ............................................................................................... 103
Starting and Stopping Data Links (Including Status Displays)................................................................... 106
Automatically Set Data Links ........................................................................................................................... 108
Procedure Through Data Link Startup ........................................................................................................ 108
Controller Link Automatic Setup................................................................................................................ 109
SYSMAC LINK Automatic Setup.............................................................................................................. 111
Transferring Automatic Data Link Setup Parameters to the Startup Node ................................................. 113
Monitoring Data Link Status ...................................................................................................................... 114
CHAPTER 11 Routing Tables ...................................................................... 117
Opening an existing Routing Table................................................................................................................... 117
Creating a new Routing Table........................................................................................................................... 117
Adding a Local Network ................................................................................................................................... 118
Adding a Remote Network................................................................................................................................ 119
Editing the Routing Table ................................................................................................................................. 120
Error Checking .................................................................................................................................................. 120
Additional Features ........................................................................................................................................... 120
CX-Server PLC Tools Page (vi)
OMRON
CX-Server PLC Tools
The Network View Screen.......................................................................................................................... 120
The Overview Screen.................................................................................................................................. 121
Table View Screen...................................................................................................................................... 121
Gateway Counter Settings........................................................................................................................... 122
Transferring a Routing Table to a PLC....................................................................................................... 124
Transferring a Routing table from a PLC ................................................................................................... 124
APPENDIX A Network Availability ............................................................ 125
C**H Device Group.......................................................................................................................................... 125
C**K Device Group.......................................................................................................................................... 125
C**P Device Group .......................................................................................................................................... 125
C1000H Device Group...................................................................................................................................... 125
C20 Device Group............................................................................................................................................. 125
C2000H Device Group...................................................................................................................................... 126
C200H Device Group........................................................................................................................................ 126
C200HE Device Group ..................................................................................................................................... 126
C200HE-Z Device Group.................................................................................................................................. 126
C200HG Device Group..................................................................................................................................... 126
C200HG-Z Device Group ................................................................................................................................. 127
C200HS Device Group ..................................................................................................................................... 127
C200HX Device Group..................................................................................................................................... 127
C200HX-Z Device Group ................................................................................................................................. 127
C500 Device Group........................................................................................................................................... 127
CJ1G Device Group .......................................................................................................................................... 127
CJ1G-H Device Group ...................................................................................................................................... 128
CJ1H-H Device Group ...................................................................................................................................... 128
CJ1M Device Group ......................................................................................................................................... 128
NSJ Device Group............................................................................................................................................. 128
CPM1 (CPM1A/CPM2*) Device Group .......................................................................................................... 128
CPM2*-S* Device Group ................................................................................................................................. 128
CQM1 Device Group ........................................................................................................................................ 129
CQM1H Device Group ..................................................................................................................................... 129
CS1G/CS1G-H Device Group .......................................................................................................................... 129
CS1H/CS1H-H Device Group .......................................................................................................................... 129
IDSC Device Group .......................................................................................................................................... 129
SRM1 – SRM1 V2 Device Group..................................................................................................................... 130
CV1000 Device Group...................................................................................................................................... 130
CV2000 Device Group...................................................................................................................................... 130
CV500 Device Group........................................................................................................................................ 130
CVM1 Device Group ........................................................................................................................................ 130
CVM1-V2 Device Group .................................................................................................................................. 130
APPENDIX B PLC Memory Areas.............................................................. 131
C**H Device Group.......................................................................................................................................... 131
C**K Device Group.......................................................................................................................................... 131
C**P Device Group .......................................................................................................................................... 131
C1000H Device Group...................................................................................................................................... 132
C20 Device Group............................................................................................................................................. 132
C2000H Device Group...................................................................................................................................... 132
C200H Device Group........................................................................................................................................ 132
C200HE Device Group ..................................................................................................................................... 134
General Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 134
CPU 32/42 Memory Areas.......................................................................................................................... 134
C200HE-Z Device Group.................................................................................................................................. 134
General Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 134
CPU 32/42 Device Group ........................................................................................................................... 135
C200HG Device Group..................................................................................................................................... 135
C200HG-Z Device Group ................................................................................................................................. 135
C200HS Device Group ..................................................................................................................................... 136
C200HX Device Group..................................................................................................................................... 136
C200HX-Z Device Group ................................................................................................................................. 136
CPU 65 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 137
CX-Server PLC Tools Page (vii)
OMRON
CX-Server PLC Tools
CPU 85 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 137
C500 Device Group........................................................................................................................................... 137
CJ1G Device Group .......................................................................................................................................... 137
General Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 137
CPU 44 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 138
CPU 45 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 138
CJ1G-H Device Group ...................................................................................................................................... 138
General Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 138
CPU 42 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 138
CPU 43 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 139
CPU 44 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 139
CPU 45 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 139
CJ1H-H Device Group ...................................................................................................................................... 139
General Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 139
CPU 65 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 140
CPU 66 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 140
CJ1M and CP1H Device Group ........................................................................................................................ 140
General Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 140
CPM1 (CPM1A) Device Group ........................................................................................................................ 140
CPM2*/CPM2*-S* Device Group.................................................................................................................... 141
CQM1 Device Group ........................................................................................................................................ 141
Memory Areas ............................................................................................................................................ 141
CPU 41/42/43/44/45 Memory Areas .......................................................................................................... 141
CQM1H Device Group ..................................................................................................................................... 142
Memory Areas ............................................................................................................................................ 142
CPU 11/21 Memory Areas.......................................................................................................................... 142
CPU 51 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 142
CPU 61 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 142
CS1G Device Group ......................................................................................................................................... 142
General Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 142
CPU 44 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 143
CPU 45 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 143
CS1G-H Device Group ..................................................................................................................................... 143
General Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 143
CPU 42 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 144
CPU 43 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 144
CPU 44 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 144
CPU 45 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 144
CS1H Device Group ......................................................................................................................................... 144
General Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 144
CPU 64 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 145
CPU 65 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 145
CPU 66 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 145
CPU 67 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 145
CS1H-H Device Group ..................................................................................................................................... 145
General Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 145
CPU 63 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 146
CPU 64 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 146
CPU 65 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 146
CPU 66 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 146
CPU 67 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 146
IDSC Device Group .......................................................................................................................................... 146
SRM1 Device Group......................................................................................................................................... 147
SRM1 V2 Device Group ................................................................................................................................... 147
CV1000 Device Group...................................................................................................................................... 147
CV2000 Device Group...................................................................................................................................... 148
CV500 Device Group........................................................................................................................................ 148
CVM1 Device Group ........................................................................................................................................ 149
General Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 149
CPU 01 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 149
CPU 11 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 149
CVM1-V2 Device Group .................................................................................................................................. 149
CX-Server PLC Tools Page (viii)
OMRON
CX-Server PLC Tools
General Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 149
CPU 01 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 150
CPU 11 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 150
CPU 21 Memory Areas............................................................................................................................... 150
FinsGateway CPU Unit..................................................................................................................................... 150
APPENDIX C Toolbars and Keyboard Shortcuts...................................... 151
Toolbars ...................................................................................................................................................... 151
Keyboard Shortcuts..................................................................................................................................... 151
Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor Component .................................................................................................... 152
Toolbars
Keyboard Shortcuts............................................................................................................. 152
Memory Card Component................................................................................................................................. 153
Toolbars
Keyboard Shortcuts............................................................................................................. 153
CX-Net Network Configuration Tool ............................................................................................................... 153
Toolbars
Keyboard Shortcuts............................................................................................................. 153
Import/Export Tool ........................................................................................................................................... 154
Toolbars
Keyboard shortcuts ............................................................................................................. 154
Data Link Editor................................................................................................................................................ 155
Toolbars
Keyboard Shortcuts............................................................................................................. 155
Routing Table Editor......................................................................................................................................... 156
Toolbars
Keyboard Shortcuts............................................................................................................ 156
GLOSSARY OF TERMS .............................................................................. 157
CX-Server PLC Tools Page (ix)
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 1 - Technical Specification
OMRON
CHAPTER 1
Technical Specification
This chapter describes the CX-Server PLC Tools software in general terms and introduces the user to the
relationship between CX-Server PLC Tools and the associated products. It also provides details of the operating
environment, minimum configuration and installation procedures necessary for the satisfactory operation of
CX-Server PC Tools.
CX-Server PLC Tools Software
PLC Tools are a collection of utilities and programs that provide configuration and control for OMRON PLCs and
Networks.
CX-Server PLC Tools consists of the following components:
♦
PLC Memory component. This component allows the user to view, edit and monitor either channels (words)
or individual bits in areas of the PLC.
♦
IO Table component. This component retrieves and configures PLC rack and address data.
♦
PLC Setup component. This component retrieves and configures PLC setting data.
♦
Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor component. This component records and displays data obtained from the
PLC’s memory areas during program execution.
♦
PLC Error component. This component displays and manages PLC errors.
♦
Memory Card component. This component manages the file storage to and from PLC memory cards.
♦
PLC-Clock component. This component configures and displays the PLC clock.
♦
Routing Table component. This component manages the routing tables, which allow PLC internode
communications.
♦
DataLink Editor component. This component allows configuration and modification of the datalink tables,
which allows data to be transferred between PLCs without any other programming.
♦
CX-Net Network Configuration tool. This tool consists of a suite of programs allowing the management of
Networks for OMRON PLCs.
CX-Server runs within the Microsoft Windows environment (Microsoft Windows 95 or later, or Microsoft
Windows NT 4.0 or later) on standard IBM and compatible Pentium-based desktop PCs.
CX-Server PLC Tools utilities form part of other CX-Automation suite applications (CX-Programmer,
CX-Server).
CX-Server PLC Tools have a close relationship with CX-Server Runtime which is the communications middleware
software for OMRON PLCs. For further information see CX-Server Runtime manual.
About this Manual
This User Manual acts as a reference for CX-Server PLC Tools by describing its various concepts and abilities, and
provides the basics of using its dialogs and supplied utilities.
Caution:
This manual is referred to from other software applications that utilise CX-Server, for instance,
CX-Programmer, CX-Protocol or SYSMAC-SCS. Subsequently, some topics contained in this user manual
may not be relevant.
The CX-Server PLC Tools come with a context-sensitive online help system which is designed to complement this
manual and to provide a quick reference at any point while using CX-Server PLC Tools when the manual is not to
hand. This general help system uses a fast hypertext system which allows progressively detailed information about
any topic to be obtained by selecting keywords within the descriptive text.
Throughout this manual it is assumed that the reader has a working knowledge of Microsoft Windows, and knows
how to:
♦
use the keyboard and mouse;
♦
select options from Microsoft Windows menus;
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 1
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 1 – Technical Specification
♦
operate dialog boxes;
♦
locate, open and save data files;
♦
edit, cut and paste text;
OMRON
♦ use the Microsoft Windows desktop environment.
If the installed version of Microsoft Windows has not been used before, it is recommended that the reader spends
some time working with it using the Microsoft documentation before using the CX-Server PLC Tools.
CX-Server 3.1 PLC Tools: New Features
This version of the CX-Server PLC Tools offers significant functionality for communication with OMRON PLCs
and management of their associated settings information.
The following list describes important features that are present in CX-Server 3.1 PLC Tools.
♦
The PLC Tools run under Microsoft Windows 95, 98, Millennium, 2000 or XP and NT4.0 with Service Pack
5 or later.
♦
The PLC Tools have support for the following communications connections:
♦
SYSMAC WAY, Toolbus (Peripheral port connection), Ethernet, Controller Link,
SYSMAC LINK, SYSMAC NET (for Microsoft Windows NT only) and FinsGateway.
New PLC support includes CS1-H, CJ1-H and CJ1-M PLCs.
System Requirements
The system requirements of CX-Server are the same as those of the CX-Programmer. Refer to page 3
in Part 1: CX-Programmer for details.
Communications Requirements
In order to use serial communication types SYSMAC WAY and Toolbus a RS232 connections via a standard serial
port on the PC (COM1 etc.) or a RS422 connections to a 422 serial board is required.
When using SYSMAC LINK directly from a PC, a SYSMAC LINK network service board and FinsGateway
version 3.12 must be installed.
To use SYSMAC NET directly from a PC, SYSMAC NET network service board and FinsGateway version 3.12
are required (Windows NT4 only).
When using Controller Link, a Controller Link network service board (wired or optical and FinsGateway version
3.12 are required.
In order to use an Ethernet net, an Ethernet card, Windows Sockets software and TCP/IP must be installed and
correctly configured.
Refer to the appropriate hardware system manuals for detailed information about connecting and configuring these
devices for the environment.
Note:
If FINS Gateway is to be used with a CLK/SLK PCI board in the Windows 98 or 2000
operating system the appropriate drivers must be installed. These drivers can be found
on the CX-Server CD under: CX-Server\WDM\CLK (PCI)\ or CX-Server\WDM\SLK (PCI)\.
Installation
CX-Server and CX-Server PLC Tools can be installed from the CX-One Package CD-ROM or the individual
CX-Programmer CD-ROM. Refer to one of the following manuals for details.
♦
Installing from CX-One: Refer to the CX-One Setup Manual.
♦
Installing from the individual CX-Programmer CD-ROM: Refer to page 4 of Part 1: CX-Programmer.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 2
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 1 - Technical Specification
OMRON
Starting CX-Server PLC Tools
CX-Server PLC Tools components are normally accessed from the invoking application. However, a number of
tools can be accessed stand-alone from the Start pushbutton on the Microsoft Windows taskbar.
CX-Net Network Configuration tool.
Help and How to Access it
The CX-Server PLC Tools come with a detailed context-sensitive help system. At any time while using the
software, it is possible to get help on the particular point that is currently being worked on, or on general aspects of
the CX-Server PLC Tools. This system is intended to complement the manual, by providing online reference to
specific functions of the software and how to use them. The manual is designed to provide more tutorial
information and discuss the various facilities offered by the CX-Server PLC Tools.
♦
Context-sensitive help;
♦
Help Index (available on the Help menu);
♦
Help Contents (available on the Help menu);
♦
About (available on the Help menu);
♦
Status Bar.
Help Topics
For any of the PLC Tools select the Help Contents option on the Help menu. The Help system provides a standard
look-up dialog under the Contents tab showing the contents of the PLC Tools Help file. Click on an item to read the
associated information.
Index
Use the following procedure to retrieve online help from the Index tab of the Help Topics dialog.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the Help Index option from the Help menu.
Enter a text query into the first step field. The second step field is refreshed according to the
query entered in the first step field.
Select an entry in the second step field and select the Display pushbutton, or double-click
on the index entry.
If an entry is linked to two or more topics, the names of the topics are displayed in the
Topics Found dialog. Select a topic and choose the Display pushbutton or double-click on
the topic.
Find
Use the following procedure to retrieve on-line help from the Find tab of the Help Topics dialog.
Select the Help Index option from the Help menu.
Select the Find tab.
Enter a text query into the first step field. The second step field is refreshed according to the
query entered in the first step field. Previous text queries can be retrieved by selecting from
the drop-down list in the first step field.
4. Select a word that matches the query – some words may be automatically selected. More
than one word can be selected by pressing Shift and selecting another word to extend the
selection, or by pressing Ctrl and selecting another word to add to the selection. The third
step field is refreshed according to the word or words selected. The number of topics found
are shown at the bottom of the dialog.
5. Select a topic from the third step field and select the Display pushbutton, or double-click
on the topic from the third step field. Select the Clear pushbutton to restart the find
operation.
The Find operation can be enhanced by the use of the Options pushbutton and Rebuild push-button. Refer to
Microsoft Windows documentation for further information.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 3
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 1 – Technical Specification
OMRON
Context-sensitive Help
The CX-Server PLC Tools support the use of context-sensitive help. The relevant online help topic is provided
automatically by selecting the current area of the display responsible for carrying out those actions. Select the F1
function key to retrieve context-sensitive help. Some dialogs include a Help pushbutton when F1 cannot be
accessed.
About CX-Server PLC Tools
Each CX-Server PLC Tools dialog contains an About option on the Help menu. The About dialog supplies
technical reference information about that dialog such as version and copyright information. It also contains
essential version number information that is required for obtaining technical support.
Use the following procedure to view the About CX-Server dialog.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Select About from the Help menu.
The About box is displayed. It provides a copyright statement and version
number of the component or tool within CX-Server.
Status Bar
The Status Bar is displayed at the bottom of many of the CX-Server dialog and PLC Tool windows. It provides
several helpful pieces of information while programming:
♦
Instant Help. A brief message appears in the Status Bar as menu commands and buttons are selected.
♦
Online Status. The online or offline status of the PLC. (i.e. connected to PLC or not).
♦
PLC Mode. When connected to a PLC, this shows the current PLC mode. Connection errors are also displayed
here.
♦
Connected PLC and CPU Type. The currently connected PLC and associated CPU can always be referenced
in the status bar.
The Status Bar can be enabled and disabled from many components and tools by selecting the Status Bar option
from the View menu.
Technical Support
If the installation instructions for this application have been followed (refer to Installation in this Chapter), no
difficulties should be encountered. However, if there is a problem, contact Customer Services.
If a problem occurs, check that it does not relate to a fault outside CX-Server or the PLC Tools. Check the
following:
♦
The PC is working correctly.
♦
The PLC is working correctly.
♦
The communications system is set up correctly.
♦ The errors are cleared in the PLC.
When Customer Services need to be contacted, keep the details shown in the following table to hand. A clear and
concise description of the problem is required, together with the exact text of any error messages.
Note:
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 4
Use the About box to obtain the version number of the component.
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 1 - Technical Specification
OMRON
Customer Services Required Information Table
Version number of CX-Server
component or tool:
Serial number of the software:
Operating system and version
number:
Language of operating system:
PLC type, model and CPU details:
Type of communications in use:
Serial Number
Toolbus
SYSMAC LINK
SYSMAC NET
Device Net
Controller Link
Ethernet
Nature of the problem:
Steps taken to reproduce problem:
Other comments:
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 5
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 2 – PLC Memory Component
OMRON
CHAPTER 2
PLC Memory Component
This chapter describes the PLC Memory component and its ability to allow the user to view, edit and monitor either
channels (words) or individual bits in areas of the PLC.
The PLC Memory component allows viewing, editing and monitoring of PLC memory areas, monitoring and
forcing of bit addresses and symbols and forced status information.
The PLC Memory component displays the values of the memory area being accessed within the PLC. Areas to be
monitored are selected from the memory area workspace. The address workspace shows individual bits, individual
channel symbols and forced status information by selecting or entering specific PLC addresses or symbol names.
The current values of these areas are displayed in the PLC Memory component. There are no values displayed
when the PLC is offline.
The PLC Memory component can be forced to stay as the top window by selecting Always on top from the View
menu.
For moving, resizing, tiling, maximising, minimising and closing windows, refer to Microsoft Windows online help
for further information.
Access to the PLC Memory component is from the invoking application.
To close the PLC Memory window, select the Close button in the title bar.
The left pane, known as the Data Area Workspace, displays the current PLC in terms of its data areas and addresses.
The data areas that form part of the PLC memory differ depending on the PLC type. The status bar provides instant
help, displays the PLC and CPU type and describes the operating mode of the PLC.
To expand the hierarchy in the left pane, select this icon.
To collapse the hierarchy in the left pane, select this icon.
To view the content of a particular branch in the hierarchy, double-click on the item in the Data
Area Workspace: a window is displayed within the PLC memory component. The associated
icon in the Data Area Workspace changes to denote that a window has been opened. Multiple
windows can be opened at the same time.
Select the Close button in the window’s title bar to close the window.
Columns can be resized using the Resize Column button from the toolbar to fit the visible
display area. These options are useful when changing data format, for instance to Binary.
The display of the Data Area Workspace can be controlled by selecting Data Area Workspace from the View menu.
The toolbar and status bar can both be turned on or off. Select Status Bar from the View menu to control the display
of the status bar. Select Toolbar from the View menu to control the display of the PLC Memory toolbar.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 7
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 2 – PLC Memory Component
OMRON
PLC Data Area
The Memory tab of the PLC Memory component allows monitoring and editing of complete memory areas as
channel data.
When the content of a memory area is opened, a window is displayed. It is possible to Zoom in
and out of the window by selecting the Zoom In button or Zoom Out button from the toolbar.
Select the Restore Zoom/Zoom to Fit button from the toolbar to return the window to the
original zoom setting.
Editing Data
Data can be entered or amended in the data area displayed provided the associated PLC or memory area allows
read/write operations. Use the following procedure to edit data in the Memory tab.
1, 2, 3…
1.
Double-click on the required data area name in the Memory tab of the Data Area
Workspace to open it. A window containing a grid representing that data area is opened.
Select an appropriate format for the data to be entered from the associated button from the
toolbar: Binary, Binary Coded Decimal, Decimal, Signed Decimal, Floating Point,
Hexadecimal, Double Floating Point or Text.
Type in valid values directly into the cells and press Return.
2.
3.
Note:
Once a format has been selected a keyboard filter is applied so that non-valid keystrokes
are ignored.
When in either Debug mode (for CV-series PLCs only) or Monitor mode: it is not possible to edit a read-only value.
PC to PLC Communications
The PLC Memory component permits the transfer of data to and from the PLC and allows comparisons to be made
between data stored on the computer and the PLC. Use the following procedure to retrieve data from the PLC.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 8
Ensure the PLC is online before activating the PLC Memory component.
Open a data area by double-clicking a data area from the Data Area Workspace in the
Memory tab.
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 2 – PLC Memory Component
OMRON
3.
Select the Transfer from PLC button from the toolbar to read information from the PLC.
4.
The Transfer from PLC dialog is displayed. Transfer can be performed on the memory areas
that have been opened in the PLC Memory component. Select the associated setting to
monitor that area.
Select the Visible Area Only option to transfer the area visible to the window, the Selection
option to transfer the area highlighted by the cursor or the All option to transfer all of the
selected memory area from the PLC. Alternatively, use the Select All pushbutton to transfer
all opened memory areas from the PLC.
Select the Upload pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the
operation.
5.
6.
Note:
By clicking an associated data area’s settings in its greyed state, the PLC Memory
component automatically identifies the data area words to be monitored.
Use the following procedure to write data back to the PLC.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Ensure the PLC is online before activating the PLC Memory component.
Open a data area by double-clicking a data area from the Data Area Workspace in the
Memory tab.
Select the Transfer to PLC button from the toolbar to transfer information to the PLC.
The Transfer to PLC dialog is displayed. Transfer can be performed on the memory areas
that have been opened in the PLC Memory component. Select the associated setting to
monitor that area.
Select the Visible Area Only option to transfer the area visible to the window, the Selection
option to transfer the area highlighted by the cursor or the All option to transfer all of the
selected memory area to the PLC. Alternatively, use the Select All pushbutton to transfer all
opened memory areas to the PLC.
Select the Download pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort
the operation.
Note:
By clicking an associated data area’s settings in its greyed state, the PLC Memory
component automatically identifies the data area words to be monitored.
The PLC Memory component allows the values stored on the PLC and the current displayed values to be compared.
Use the following procedure to compare PLC and PC values.
Ensure the PLC is online before activating the PLC Memory component.
Select the Compare with PLC button from the toolbar to compare information between the
PC and the PLC.
3. The Compare with PLC dialog is displayed. Comparisons can be performed on the memory
areas that have been opened in the PLC Memory component. Select the associated setting to
compare that area.
4. Select the Visible Area Only option to compare the area visible to the window, the Selection
option to compare the area highlighted by the cursor, or the All option to compare all of the
selected memory area to the PLC. Alternatively, use the Select All pushbutton to compare
all opened memory areas.
5. Select the Compare pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the
operation.
Whilst comparing, all values resident on the PLC that are different to those on the PC are annotated in brackets.
Further editing to the data area causes further differences between PC and PLC versions, and these are also
annotated.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Timer/Counter Memory areas
Whether online or offline the PLC Memory component enables the data in the Timer (TIM) and Counter (CNT)
memory areas to be formatted using either Binary Coded Decimal (BCD), Hexadecimal or Decimal data types.
When an Online transfer to PLC operation is executed, the PLC Memory Component will read the TIM/CNT mode
setting from the PLC. If the TIM/CNT mode is set to BCD, then the command will be actioned only if the current
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 9
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 2 – PLC Memory Component
OMRON
data type is also BCD. If the data type is not BCD, then a warning message will be displayed, and the commend will
be aborted.
If the TIM/CNT mode is set to Binary, the command will only be actioned if the current data type is Decimal or
Hexadecimal. If the current data is neither Decimal or Hexadecimal, then a warning message will be displayed, and
the command will be aborted.
When an Online Transfer from a PLC, Compare or Monitor operation is executed, the PLC Memory Component
will read the data from the PLC and display it in the currently selected data format. If the data can not be displayed
in the currently selected format, then an error message will be displayed.
Note:
The Timer (TIM) and Counter (CNT) memory areas are only available in the following
PLCs: CS1G-H, CS1H-H, CJ1G-H, CJ1H-H, CJ1M, and CP1H.
Monitoring Data
Use the following procedure to monitor the data in PLC memory:
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Ensure the PLC is online before activating the PLC Memory component.
Select the Monitor button from the toolbar to monitor the PLC.
3.
The Monitor dialog is displayed. Monitoring can be performed on the memory areas that
have been opened in the PLC Memory component. Select the associated setting to monitor
that area.
4. Select the Visible Area Only option to monitor the area visible to the window or the
Selection option to monitor the area highlighted by the cursor.
5. Select the Monitor pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the
operation.
Once monitoring, all changes to the data area are viewed. By navigating around the data area window, the visible
area of the monitoring set by the Visible Area Only option changes to compensate.
Note 1: In the PLC Memory Window, individual values (cells) can be selected and the following
operations can be performed to change present values during monitoring.
• For BIN (binary) displays, click the On, Off, ForceOn, ForceOff, ForceCanc,
SetValue button to change the value of a bit.
The value can also be changed by right-clicking and then selecting Force | On, Force |
Off, Force | Cancel, or Set |On, Set | Off, Set | Value from the pop-up menu.
• For other displays (e.g., decimal, BCD, or HEX), click the SetValue button to change
the present value.
The present value can also be changed by right-clicking and then selecting Set | Value
from the pop-up menu.
Note 2: Continuous addresses can be monitored in the PLC Memory window by specifying the
start address to be monitored. Set the start address in the Start Address field shown
below and the display in the window will jump to the specified address for monitoring.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 10
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 2 – PLC Memory Component
OMRON
• In the PLC Memory window, both individual bits for each word and the hexadecimal
value of the word can be monitored at the same time if the display format is set to BIN
(binary).
Clearing and Filling Data Areas
A whole data area can be cleared by clicking on the Clear Data Area button from the toolbar.
A whole data area can be populated with a particular value. Use the following procedure to fill a data area with a
single value.
1, 2, 3…
1.
Open a data area by double-clicking a data area from the Data Area Workspace in the
Memory tab.
2.
3.
Select the Fill Data Area button from the toolbar. The Fill Data Area dialog is displayed.
The Fill operation can be performed on the memory areas that have been opened in the PLC
Memory component. Select the associated setting to fill that area.
Supply the value in the Value field.
Select the appropriate Fill Range option, either All, Visible Area Only or the selection
currently highlighted by the cursor.
Select a Value option, either Binary, Binary Coded Decimal, Decimal, Signed Decimal or
Hexadecimal.
If required, select a Set Status Value setting and the appropriate On or Off option.
Select the Fill pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the
operation.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 11
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 2 – PLC Memory Component
OMRON
PLC Address Area
The Address tab of the PLC Memory dialog allows monitoring and forcing the status of individual bits.
Monitoring
Use the following to monitor an address or a symbol from an invoking application.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ensure the PLC is online before activating the PLC Memory component.
Click on the Address tab of the PLC Memory component.
Open the Monitor area by double-clicking the Monitor branch from the Data Area
Workspace in the Address tab.
Enter an address in the Address field or select a Symbol to be retained from the invoking
application:
♦
In a Symbol field, type in a Symbol name or select the Browse button to select a Symbol to be
retained from the invoking application. The corresponding Address field automatically detects
and contains the address associated with the Symbol.
♦
If a Symbol has not been selected, in an Address field, type in a direct word or bit address to
monitor.
Note:
Address notation for CS/CJ/CP-series PLCs and CV-series PLCs is, for instance ‘D0’,
‘0’, ‘E0.0’ to monitor a word, ‘0.0’, ‘cf100’ to monitor bits.
When monitoring starts, data from the PLC is displayed in the Value field, in the format specified
in the Format field. The display format of the address or symbol to be monitored can be changed
by selecting an appropriate button from the toolbar: Binary, Binary Coded Decimal, Decimal,
Signed Decimal, Hexadecimal or Text.
Any special address information is shown in the Attribute field. The attribute of a bit can be forced. It is not possible
to force bit addresses that are read-only. Use the following procedure to apply a forced setting.
Ensure a bit is currently being monitored and is not read-only.
Select the Attributes setting for the bit.
Select the forced state of the bit. A bit can be forced on by selecting the Force On button
from the toolbar. A bit can be forced off by selecting the Force Off button from the toolbar.
Forced settings can be cancelled by selecting the Force Cancel button from the toolbar.
Select the Set Value button from the toolbar to set a value to the attribute.
The update rate is shown in the Properties field.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 12
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 2 – PLC Memory Component
OMRON
Further rows can be inserted into the Address Monitor window by selecting Insert from the Address menu. Rows
can be removed by selecting Remove from the Address menu. All rows can be removed by selecting Remove All
from the Address menu.
Forced Settings
It is possible to specify the state of an address regardless of its actual (physical) state, this is particularly useful for
testing certain conditions or rungs in a ladder program.
Once scanned, the Forced Status window displays the address, value and attributes for all forced bits.
It is not possible to force bit addresses that are read-only.
Displaying Forced Status
The forced status of bits can be retrieved from the PLC. Use the following procedure to retrieve the forced status of
bits from the PLC.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
Ensure the PLC is online before activating the PLC Memory component.
Click on the Address tab of the PLC Memory component.
Click the right-mouse button on the Forced Status branch and select Scan Forced Status.
All bit areas in the PLC are scanned to find all forced bits (Forced On and Forced Off). The
Forced Status window is displayed showing all forced bits and their associated value and
attributes.
Copying a Forced Bit
A forced bit can be copied from the Force Status window to the Address Monitor window. Use the following
procedure to copy a forced bit.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ensure the PLC is online before activating the PLC Memory component.
Click on the Address tab of the PLC Memory component.
Open the Forced Status area by double-clicking the Forced Status branch from the Data
Area Workspace in the Address tab.
Select the address to be copied with the right-mouse button in the Forced Status window and
select Copy to Symbol Monitor Address.
Clearing Forced Bits
All forced bits can be cleared. Use the following procedure to clear forced bits.
Caution: This operation will clear all forced bits in the PLC.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Ensure the PLC is online before activating the PLC Memory component.
Click on the Address tab of the PLC Memory component.
Open the Forced Status area by double-clicking the Forced Status branch from the Data
Area Workspace in the Address tab.
Click the right-mouse button in the Forced Status window and select Clear All Forced
Addresses.
Select the Yes pushbutton to confirm the operation.
Updating the Forced Status Window
Use the following procedure to refresh the Force Status window.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ensure the PLC is online before activating the PLC Memory component.
Click on the Address tab of the PLC Memory component.
Open the Forced Status area by double-clicking the Forced Status branch from the Data
Area Workspace in the Address tab.
Click the right-mouse button in the Forced Status window and select Refresh.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 13
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 2 – PLC Memory Component
OMRON
PLC Memory Management
A number of features of the PLC Memory Component are common to both the Memory tab and Address tab.
PLC Memory component files can be saved to the CX-Server project. Use the following procedure to save PLC
Memory component details to the CX-Server project.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Select the Save in Project button from the toolbar. The Save dialog is displayed.
Select the required data areas to include in the file from the Areas to Save: field.
3. Enter a comment in the File Comment field.
4. Select the OK pushbutton to proceed.
PLC Memory component files can be saved via a standard File Save dialog. Use the following procedure to save a
PLC Memory component file.
Select Save to File from the File menu. The Save dialog is displayed.
The Save dialog is displayed. Select the required data areas to include in the file from the
Areas to Save: field.
3. Enter a comment in the File Comment field.
4. Select the OK pushbutton to proceed.
5. A standard File Save dialog is displayed. Enter a file name in the File name field and select
the Save pushbutton. PLC Memory files have a .MEM extension.
Information saved to a file can be supplemented with header information set as a preference. Refer to Chapter 2 PLC Memory Component for details of setting header information to a file.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
PLC Memory component files can be retrieved via a standard File Open dialog. Use the following procedure to
open a PLC Memory component file.
1, 2, 3…
1.
Select the Open File button from the toolbar to open a PLC Memory component file. A
confirmation message box may appear if the file is already open. Select the Yes pushbutton
to save the currently open details. Select the No pushbutton to discard the currently open
details. Select the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation.
2. A standard File Open dialog is displayed. Select a file from the Open PLC Memory File
dialog, followed by the Open pushbutton. PLC Memory files have a .MEM extension.
PLC Memory component data can be printed. Use the following procedure to print details.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Open the Address Monitor window from the Address tab or a data area window from the
Memory tab.
Select the Print Preview button from the toolbar. A preview window is displayed.
3.
Select the appropriate pushbutton to view the printout.
♦
Select the Next Page pushbutton to view the next page of the printout;
♦
Select the Prev Page pushbutton to view the next page of the printout;
♦
Select the Two Page pushbutton to view two pages of the printout at once;
♦
Select the Zoom In pushbutton to zoom in to the page;
♦
Select the Zoom Out pushbutton to zoom out from the page;
♦
Select the Print pushbutton to print from the preview.
♦
Select the Close pushbutton to close the preview window.
4.
Select the Print button from the toolbar. A standard Print dialog is displayed.
5.
Set up the required printer settings. Select the OK pushbutton to print the PLC Memory
details or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation.
Note:
Printer specific settings can be applied prior to printing the PLC Memory details, by
selecting Print Setup from the File menu.
Use the following procedure to copy or move information from or in the PLC Memory component.
1, 2, 3…
1.
Select an item or items in a window.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 14
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 2 – PLC Memory Component
OMRON
2.
3.
4.
Select the Copy button from the toolbar to copy the item, or the Cut button from the toolbar
to move the item.
Select an area to move the items to, for instance copying data area values into another data
area.
Select the Paste button from the toolbar to paste the item. A Paste operation can be
performed several times without copying again.
PLC Memory Preferences
PLC Memory component preferences permits the setting of display properties for data monitoring.
The Display tab defines the preferred display format. Use the following procedure to change the display format
preference:
Select the Preferences option from the View menu.
Select the appropriate word display format option, either Binary, Binary Coded Decimal,
Decimal, Signed Decimal, Floating Point, Hexadecimal, Double Floating Point or Text.
3. Select the appropriate bit display format option, either Text or Numeric.
4. If required, select the appropriate font using the Change Font pushbutton.
5. Select the OK pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the
operation.
The Monitoring tab allows the monitor update interval preference to be amended. Use the following procedure to
change the monitor update interval preference.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Select the Preferences option from the View menu.
Select the Monitoring tab.
Select a Monitor Update Interval and an associated Unit from the fields.
Select the OK pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the
operation.
The General tab permits the setting of general preferences. Use the following procedure to change the general
preferences.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
Select the Preferences option from the View menu.
Select the General tab.
Select the Automatically Resize Column Widths option to ensure that all values remain
visible within the data area window irrespective of their display format. It is best practise for
this option to be set OFF when monitoring large data areas.
4. Select the Prompt Before Closing an Active Monitor Window option if confirmation is
required before closing a data area window that is being monitored.
5. Select the Beep on Invalid Input option to receive an audible beep when an invalid input to
the PLC Memory component has been made.
6. Select the Fast Window Update option to reduce the affect of flickering when monitoring.
7. Select the OK pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the
operation.
The File tab permits the setting of header information into PLC memory component files. Use the following
procedure to change the file information.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the Preferences option from the View menu.
Select the File tab.
Insert a file name in the File Name field.
Insert a comment in the Comment field.
Select the OK pushbutton to accept the settings or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the
operation.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 15
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 3 – IO Table Component
OMRON
CHAPTER 3
IO Table Component
This chapter describes the IO Table component available to C-series, CV-series, CS/CJ series PLCs and its ability
to create, retrieve and edit a configured PLC’s rack and address data.
The IO Table component allows configuration of racks, slots and units within a PLC, using available hardware as
reference. Within a PLC there are three versions of an IO Table, all of which should ideally have the same contents.
IO Table component editing allows manipulation of the internal version of the table, and modification of the PLC’s
view of how the hardware is configured. The three versions are:
♦
Actual IO Table. The real hardware configuration of the PLC units and slots on power-up.
♦
Registered IO Table. The internal PLC table: this is the one used by the PLC when running, regardless of the
state of the actual hardware. It can be read and, for C2000 PLCs, CV-series PLCs and CS/CJ series PLCs,
written to by the CX-Server software.
♦
CX-Server IO Table. The IO configuration understood by CX-Server. It can be created and modified directly,
independently from the PLC, and can be transferred with a program (for CV-series and CS/CJ series PLCs).
The Registered Table and CX-Server’s table can be changed from the PC, but the actual configuration requires the
physical manipulation of the PLC hardware. It is only possible to transfer the Registered IO Table in C2000, CV
and CS/CJ series PLCs to the PLC. Editing of individual IO units in the Registered IO Table is only available in
C1000H, C2000H, CS/CJ series and CV-series PLCs.
The IO Table component is displayed as a hierarchical structure. The IO Table view can be expanded to show
entries for all Remote Terminals (RTs) and the IO. All possible racks and unit numbers for the active PLC are
displayed although these may not all be in use. An address and IO string are displayed against each rack slot or unit;
this is used to indicate the input and output characteristics of the unit.
The status bar displays the selected PLC and CPU type, and the current operating mode of the PLC.
When a Remote Terminal (RT) is added, it can be expanded to provide the Terminals view, showing entries for all
slots on that remote rack.
Icons to the left of a rack indicate units fitted to expansion racks, SYSBUS/SYSBUS2 remote racks or IO
Terminals. To view the content of the IO Table, double-click on a rack. The unit address is displayed in brackets for
each slot.
For CV-series PLCs, SIOU units are shown on the IO Table tree as a separate rack. For CS/CJ series PLCs, SIOU
units are all integrated into the main rack.
Whilst in online mode operations can be selected that affect the PLC, for instance creating an IO Table. These
options are only available when the PLC is in the correct mode of operation for programming.
The IO Table component can be forced to be displayed in focus by selecting Always on top from the Options menu.
For moving, resizing, maximising, minimising and closing windows, refer to Microsoft Windows online help for
further information.
Access to the IO Table component is from the invoking application or via the CX-Net Network Configuration Tool.
Refer to Chapter 8 - CX-Net Network Configuration Tool for further details.
To close the IO Table dialog, select the Close button in the title bar.
I/O Table Window Variations
CX-Programmer Versions 6.0 and later have the following two kinds of I/O Table Windows.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
I/O Table Window for the CS/CJ/CP Series (known as the CS/CJ/CP I/O Table Window)
I/O Table Window for the C Series and CVM1/CV Series (known as the C/CV I/O Table
Window)
Auto-selection of the I/O Table Window
The following table shows which I/O Table Window will be selected automatically, based on the PLC model and
computer operating system.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 17
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 3 – IO Table Component
OMRON
PLC Series
PLC model
Computer’s operating system
Selected I/O Table Window
CS/CJ/CP Series
CS1G/CJ1G, CS1H, CS1G-H, CS1H-H,
CS1D-H, CS1D-S, CJ1G-H, CJ1H-H, or
CJ1M
Windows OS other than Windows 95
1)
CS/CJ/CP I/O Table
Window
Windows 95
2)
Series other than
CS/CJ/CP
C Series:
C200H, C200HS, C200HX/HG/HE,
C200HX-Z/HG-Z/HE-Z, C500,
C1000H, or C2000H
Windows 95 or other Windows OS
C/CV I/O Table Window
(See note.)
CVM1/CV Series:
CVM1, CVM1-V2, CV1000, CV2000,
or CV500 C2000H
FQM1 Series:
FQM1-CM001, FQM1-MMA21, or
FQM1-MMP21
Note:
With version 5.0 and earlier versions of the CX-Programmer, the C/CV I/O Table
Window is always selected, regardless of the PLC model and operating system.
Distinguishing between the CS/CJ/CP and C/CV I/O Table Windows
The I/O Table Windows can be identified by the names in the project directory tree and the colors of icons, as
shown in the following table.
I/O Table Window variation
Names in project directory tree
1) CS/CJ/CP I/O Table Window
I/O Table and Unit Setup
Colors of icons in project directory tree
: Grey and yellow
2) C/CV I/O Table Window
I/O Table
: Sky blue
I/O Table Window Functions
The following table describes the functions of the two I/O Table Windows.
I/O Table Window variation
Existing functions
1) CS/CJ/CP I/O Table
Window
Creating a registered I/O table
(Displays Unit type, number of Units occupied, and
number of I/O words occupied.)
•
Software switch settings (See note 1.)
•
Unit settings (See note 1.)
•
Replace Unit online.
•
Display Unit production information.
•
Register/display Unit comment.
•
Register/display Unit profile.
•
Monitor Unit error log.
New functions
•
Special I/O Unit and CPU Bus Unit
parameter settings
•
Specialized Support Tool startup function
(See note 2.)
•
Display a Rack’s current consumption
(CS/CJ Series only) and Rack width (CJ
Series only)
•
Monitor CPU DIP Switch settings online.
Note 2.
When the CX-Programmer is installed from
the CX-One.
Note 1.
The software switch settings and Unit settings are
included in the Special I/O Unit and CPU Bus Unit
parameter settings.
2) C/CV I/O Table Window
Creating a registered I/O table
(Displays Unit type, number of Units occupied, and
number of I/O words occupied.)
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 18
•
Software switch settings
•
CPU Bus Unit settings
•
Replace Unit online.
•
Display Unit production information.
•
Monitor Unit error log.
•
When editing the I/O table offline, words can be
reserved by installing Dummy Units.
None
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 3 – IO Table Component
OMRON
Special I/O Unit and CPU Bus Unit Settings
One of the new CS/CJ/CP I/O Table Window functions sets the allocated DM area, allocated CIO area, and CPU
Bus Unit Area (Ethernet Units only) for CS/CJ/CP-series Special I/O Units and CPU Bus Units without requiring
the parameter addresses. (This function is supported by the CS/CJ/CP I/O Table Window only.) Even if new
Special I/O Units and CPU Bus Units are purchased, the new Units parameters can be set just by installing the
Unit’s CPS (Component and network Profile Sheet), so it isn’t necessary to upgrade the CX-Programmer.
CPS File Overview
The term CPS is short for the “Component and network Profile Sheet”, which is a CX-One file containing
definition information for a CS/CJ/CP-series Unit or other component. The CPS files are provided in XML file
format.
The CX-Programmer uses the information in the CPS files to identify CS/CJ/CP-series Units in the I/O Table.
Special I/O Unit and CPU Bus Unit settings are also based on these CPS files.
The CPS files are composed of the following CS/CJ/CP-series Unit/Component information:
•
ID information (such as the model number, name, Unit type, and Unit version)
•
Parameter information (offset address, setting parameter name, and setting range or selection options)
CX-Programmer I/O Table
CPS file for Unit A
CPS file for Unit B
ID information
ID information
Parameter information
Parameter information
Data read
Unit A settings
Data read
Unit B settings
Parameter information
Parameter information
Parameter data itself
Parameter data itself
Special I/O Unit or
CPU Bus Unit
Unit A
Special I/O Unit or
CPU Bus Unit
Unit B
Specialized Tool Startup Overview (Supported when CX-Programmer Is
Installed from CX-One)
The Specialized Tool Startup function is a new CS/CJ/CP I/O Table Window function that can start the
Programming Support Tool specific to a particular Unit (Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit) directly from the I/O
Table Window. (This function is supported by the CS/CJ/CP I/O Table Window only.) This function is supported
when the CX-Programmer or other Support Tool is installed from the CX-One. The appropriate Programming
Support Tool can start with the necessary PLC model information, Unit type, and online/offline status information.
Displaying an I/O Table
Displaying the CS/CJ/CP I/O Table Window
The CS/CJ/CP I/O Table Window is displayed when the PLC is a CS/CJ/CP-series PLC and the computer’s
operating system is a Windows OS more recent than Windows 95.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 19
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 3 – IO Table Component
OMRON
Rack’s starting CIO address
Slot number
Unit model
(See note.)
Unit’s starting CIO address
Unit name
Number of Unit
resources occupied
by Special I/O Unit
Special I/O Unit’s
unit number
Number of output words
and number of input
words
Note: The Unit model will be blank if there is no CPS file.
The Unit model will also be blank when data for C200H Special I/O
Units has been uploaded from the PLC (Transfer from PLC).
Note:
In the CS/CJ I/O Table Window, the current consumption and width for each PLC Rack
can be displayed as shown below by selecting Options - Consumption and Width.
Online, the current status of the DIP switches on the target PLC (CPU Unit) can be
checked by selecting Options - DipSwitch Information.
Displaying the C/CV I/O Table Window
The C/CV I/O Table Window is displayed when the PLC is not a CS/CJ/CP-series PLC or the computer’s operating
system is Windows 95.
Rack’s starting CIO address
Slot number
Special I/O
Unit’s unit
number
Unit’s starting CIO address
Unit name
Rack number
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 20
Number of output words and
number of input words
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 3 – IO Table Component
OMRON
Unit Settings
Settings for the CS/CJ/CP I/O Table Window
The CS/CJ/CP I/O Table Window is displayed when the PLC is a CS/CJ/CP-series PLC and the computer’s
operating system is a Windows OS more recent than Windows 95.
Creating an IO Table
Creation of an IO Table whilst connected to a PLC causes the Actual IO Table in the hardware to be written to the
Registered IO Table. An IO Table can also be edited offline and stored to file, this method is usually employed
when designing a PLC’s IO Table.
To create an IO Table, select Create from the Options menu.
Slot Allocation
The following procedure shows how to edit the I/O table in the I/O Table Window.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Right-click the slot where the Unit will be allocated and select Add Unit (or just
double-click the desired slot). The Select Unit Dialog Box will be displayed.
Select the desired Unit (Unit to be allocated) from the directory tree menu and click the OK
Button.
Setting Parameters for CS/CJ/CP-series CPU Bus Units and Special I/O Units
After the I/O table has been created, the I/O table and Special I/O Unit/CPU Bus Unit parameters can be transferred
from the PLC and edited in the computer, as shown in the following example.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Connect the CX-Programmer online and open the I/O Table Window.
Select Options – Transfer from the PLC from the I/O Table Window’s menu. The Transfer
from the PLC Dialog Box will be displayed. At this point, the I/O Table and SIO Unit
Parameters Options can be selected.
Select the options (check the boxes) for the data that you want to transfer and click the
Transfer
Button.
In
this
case,
both
options
have
been
selected.
The I/O table and Unit parameters data will be transferred from the PLC and the transfer
results will be displayed.
Check the transfer results and click the OK Button. The I/O table transferred from the PLC
will be displayed.
To edit the parameters of a Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit, select the Unit and either
double-click the Unit or select Edit – SIO Unit Parameters from the menu. The selected
Unit’s Edit Parameters Dialog Box will be displayed.
In this case, a Controller Link Unit’s Edit Parameters Dialog Box has been displayed to edit
the Unit’s CPU Bus Unit Allocation DM Settings.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 21
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 3 – IO Table Component
6.
7.
8.
OMRON
Edit the parameters and, if necessary, click the Compare Button. If the Compare Button is
clicked while the PLC is online, the software immediately checks whether the I/O table
settings match the Unit settings (such as the allocated DM area and CIO area) actually in the
PLC’s CPU Unit.
If the contents do not match, the settings read from the actual Unit will be displayed in
orange.
When you want to download the parameters set for each Unit to the PLC’s CPU Unit, click
the Download to Unit Button.
Click the Reset Button to enable the parameter settings that have been transferred.
Note 1: When Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit settings are edited in the I/O Table Window,
the parameters allocated in the DM Area or CPU Bus Unit Setup Area for the Unit are
only transferred to the actual PLC when the Transfer PC to Unit Button is clicked in
the Edit Parameters Dialog Box. They are not automatically enabled, i.e., the new
parameter settings will not be used. Click the Reset Button to enable the parameter
settings that have been transferred. When the Reset Button is clicked, however,
unexpected operation may result. Always confirm system safety before clicking the
Reset Button.
Note 2: When the CX-Programmer creates the Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit settings in the
I/O Table Window, it automatically uses the latest version of the CPS file that is
available in the computer.
•
If the actual Unit’s version number is older than the latest CPS file in the computer,
a warning will be displayed when the settings are downloaded to the Unit. A Dialog
Box will ask whether to change the computer’s settings.
In general, click the Yes Button to change the computer’s settings. When the Yes
Button is clicked, the Unit version in the computer’s Unit settings will be changed to
the actual Unit’s version number. (If the No Button is clicked, the version number in
the computer will be newer than the actual Unit’s version number, and the newer
version number will be displayed.)
•
Similarly, if the actual Unit’s version number is newer than the latest CPS file in the
computer when the Unit’s settings are transferred from the PLC to the computer, the
computer’s earlier Unit version number will be displayed. In this case, install the
Unit’s correct (newer) CPS file in the computer. For details, refer to Installing a CPS
File below.
If the newer CPS File is not installed, the newer version’s Unit settings cannot be set
and only the older Unit settings (in the older CPS file) can be set.
Note 3: Storing the Parameter Settings Data File
•
The data set in the Edit Parameters Dialog Box can be saved in a parameter settings
file with a .xml filename extension. To save the parameter settings, right-click the
desired Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit in the I/O table and select Save
Parameters from the pop-up menu.
•
The saved parameter settings can also be read from a parameter settings file (.xml
filename extension), but the settings must be for the same model Special I/O Unit or
CPU Bus Unit.
Note 4: Contents of Parameter Settings Data Files
The structure of a parameter settings data file is based on the parameter settings in the
CPS file. Parameter settings data files contain the following data:
•
Model number, Unit version number, unit number, rack number, and slot number
•
Name of the original CPS file used to create the parameter settings data
•
Parameter names and data
Note 5: When Special I/O Unit or CPU Unit settings are performed in the I/O Table Window
and then transferred from the PLC Memory Window, the following warning will be
displayed if the allocated DM Area/CIO Area addresses set for Special I/O Units or
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 22
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 3 – IO Table Component
OMRON
CPU Bus Units in the I/O Table Window on the computer overlap with the PLC data
table addresses.
Unless the CPU Bus Unit or Special I/O Unit settings have been previously transferred
to the CPU Unit and the allocated DM Area/CIO Area data in the PLC data table for
Special I/O Units or CPU Bus Units is to be overwritten, always click the No Button,
shift the address, and repeat the transfer procedure.
Note 6: CPU Bus Unit and Special I/O Unit settings are not checked for logical consistency. Be
very careful of the logical consisting of the overall settings when making any setting that
affects other settings, e.g., settings that enable or disable other settings. Transfer the
Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit settings to the PLC and then start operation, being
aware that any logical inconsistencies may produce unexpected operation. For example,
if one setting selects either user settings or default settings and is set to use the default
settings, it will not automatically change to enable user settings even if the related user
settings are made. To use the user settings, they will have to be enabled manually and
specifically in the setting that selects either user settings or default settings.
Note 7: If Create I/O Table is selected when setting Special I/O Units or CPU Bus Units in the
I/O Table Window, the settings in the Special I/O Units or CPU Bus Units on the
computer will be initialized. To maintain the same settings, save the Special I/O Unit or
CPU Bus Unit settings to a file by right-clicking the Unit in the I/O table and selecting
Save Parameters from the pop-up menu. Then, after creating the I/O tables, read the
settings back from the file by right-clicking the Unit in the I/O table and selecting Load
Parameters from the pop-up menu.
Installing a CPS File
CPS files are automatically installed in the following directory when CX-One or CX-Programmer is installed. A
CPS file is created for each unit version of each Special I/O Unit and CPU Bus Unit.
Program Files\Common Files\Omron\Profiles\CPSFiles
The CX-Programmer uses the CPS File for the most recent unit version. If a backup indicates that a newer unit
version exists, the newer version’s CPS file must be installed. Use the following procedure to install the new CPU
File.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
Select File – CPS Install. The Installation of Cps files Dialog Box will be displayed.
Specify the CPS file to be installed.
Restart the CX-Programmer.
Printing the I/O Table or Unit Parameter Settings
The following procedure explains how to print the I/O table or a parameter list of Special I/O Unit and CPU Bus
Unit settings.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 23
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 3 – IO Table Component
1, 2, 3…
OMRON
1.
Select the desired Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit in the I/O table and select File – Print
from the pop-up menu. The Print Dialog Box will be displayed.
Option
Function
I/O Table
Prints the I/O table.
Special Unit Settings
Prints a parameter list of the Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit settings.
I/O Table + Special Unit Settings
Prints the I/O table and a parameter list of the Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit settings.
2.
3.
Select the desired print option and click the OK Button. The Print Dialog Box will be
displayed.
To preview a print job, select File – Print Preview, select the desired print option in the
Print Dialog Box, and click the OK Button.
Note 1: When using Windows NT 4.0, the text characters may be altered in the I/O table’s print
preview. In this case, reinstall the most recent Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack.
Note 2: When making parameter settings for a Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit in the I/O
Table Window and transferring data from the PLC Memory Window, a warning will be
displayed if the addresses in the transferred PLC data file overlap the allocated DM
Area or allocated CIO Area addresses set for the Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit in
the computer’s I/O Table Window.
Always click the No Button if you do not want to overwrite the actual PLC’s (CPU
Unit’s) allocated DM Area or allocated CIO Area address data with the PLC data table
data after the Unit settings data has been transferred to the PLC (CPU Unit). After
cancelling the write operation, remove the PLC data table’s allocated DM/allocated
CIO area from the areas that will be transferred and then transfer the data again.
Settings for the C/CV Series I/O Table Window
The C/CV Series I/O Table Window is displayed when the PLC is not a CS/CJ/CP-series PLC or the computer’s
operating system is Windows 95.
Creating an IO Table
Creation of an IO Table whilst connected to a PLC causes the Actual IO Table in the hardware to be written to the
Registered IO Table. An IO Table can also be edited offline and stored to file, this method is usually employed
when designing a PLC’s IO Table.
To create an IO Table, Select Create from the Options menu.
Slot Allocation
Use the following procedure to allocate a unit to a slot.
Select an empty slot in the IO Table component.
Click the right-mouse button and select a unit. For Single and Multiple IO Units a secondary
selection is required from the right-mouse button menu. The type of PLC series and
individual rack configurations determine the units that can be installed and therefore the
content of the right-mouse button menu. The types of unit that can be selected are described
in following paragraphs.
Slots can also be allocated by transferring the rack information from the PLC. Refer to IO Table Component in this
chapter for information regarding transferring IO Table information from the PLC.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 24
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 3 – IO Table Component
OMRON
For CS/CJ/CP series PLCs, the IO fields for racks, slots and units information can be edited directly in the IO Table
tree.
Only those units in the Registered IO Table for CS/CJ/CP series PLCs, C200H (including C200HS/X/G/E) PLCs
and CV/CVM1-series PLCs can be edited.
Note:
Any slots allocated must be verified to ensure that the Real IO Table has been setup up
correctly.
Single and Multiple Units
Points with an IO Type of Input, Output or Input/Output can be applied to the IO Table component. Each point
contains a name and an address indicating its position in PLC memory. The information contained within a point
can be read or updated by the controlling system and its status and content stored in the system’s database. An
application accesses this point data by establishing a link between the application and the database. A point can
have the same address as another and any comment entered against this address applies to all points at that location.
All PLC series support 8-point, 16-point, 32-point and 64-point Units. CV-series PLCs and CS/CJ/CP-series PLCs
also support 128-point and 256-point Units.
Refer to the Run Time manual for an introduction to points.
Counters, Position Controller, Numerical Control and ASCII Units
Use the following procedure to apply unit settings to Counters, Position Controllers, Numerical Control and ASCII
units.
Allocate a slot to be a Counter unit, Position Controller unit, Numerical Control unit or
ASCII unit. The Enter SIOU Details dialog is displayed.
2. Enter valid settings for the Unit Number field, Address per Unit field, Input Words field and
Output Words field. Valid settings exclude those settings that have already been used.
3. Select the OK pushbutton to complete the operation or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the
operation.
Additionally for Counters, Numerical Control and ASCII units, for CV-series PLCs and CS/CJ/CP series PLCs, the
CIO and DM Address range need to be specified; refer to Chapter 3 - Software Switches for further information.
1, 2, 3…
1.
Interrupt Units
Interrupt units are automatically assigned until the maximum number of units has been reached.
Sysmac-Bus Master Unit and Remote Terminals
If the Sysmac-Bus Master option is selected from the context menu, the hierarchy in the IO Table component can be
further expanded to expose the Remote Terminals and IO Terminals that form part of the SYSMAC-BUS option.
Use the following procedure to apply unit settings to Sysmac-Bus Master.
Allocate a slot to be a Sysmac-Bus Master unit. The Enter RM Number dialog is displayed.
Select a unit number from the Unit Number field, either 0 or 1.
Select the OK pushbutton to complete the operation or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the
operation.
The Sysmac-Bus Master unit provides two types of slave units that can be applied to the slave rack in the same
manner as a normal rack:
1, 2, 3…
♦
1.
2.
3.
C500H Remote Terminal (RT);
♦ C200H Remote Terminal (RT).
Any units on the slave racks or other Remote IO Units connected to the master are allocated IO words according to
the slot where the master is located.
For C1000H and C2000H PLCs, Word multipliers are required to set the base address of IO Terminals on each
SYSMAC-BUS Remote Master.
SIOU/Communications Units
SIOU/Communications Units can only be set up for CV-series PLCs and CS/CJ/CP series PLCs.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 25
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 3 – IO Table Component
OMRON
For CV-series PLCs SIOU/Communications Units the following Unit Setup and Software Switches setup can be
performed:
♦
Basic (Software Switches setup only);
♦
DeviceNet Master (Software Switches setup only);
♦
Controller Link;
♦
Ethernet;
♦
Host Link;
♦
ISA Board Unit (Software Switches setup only);
♦
ME-Net (Software Switches setup only);
♦
Mini-map (Software Switches setup only);
♦
M-Net (Software Switches setup only);
♦
Motion Controller (Software Switches setup only);
♦
PC (Software Switches setup only);
♦
Syslink;
♦
Sysmac-Bus Master;
♦ SysNet.
For CS/CJ series PLCs SIOU/Communications Units the following Unit Setup and Software Switches setup can be
performed:
♦
Controller Link Unit;
♦
Device Net and Open Network controllers;
♦
Ethernet Unit;
♦ Serial Communications Unit (Software Switches setup only).
Most of the settings for SIOU/Communications Units should have been set via the PLC setup component. Refer to
Chapter 4 - PLC Setup Component for further details.
Refer to Chapter 3 - Unit Setup and Software Switches for further information.
Caution: Setup to SIOUs that have already been registered should be applied carefully.
Verifying Correct Configuration
If a change is made to the IO configuration that affects a type of IO word or the number of words required by a unit,
for instance adding or removing units, an IO verification error occurs. Select Verify from the Options menu to
ensure that an IO verification error has not occurred. If an error has occurred, use the procedures explained in
Chapter 3 - Creating an IO Table, Chapter 3 - Slot Allocation and Chapter 3 - Transfer an IO Table to rectify any
error.
Unit Setup
The Unit Setup for a selected rack IO option can be edited for CV-series and CS/CJ/CP series PLCs only. For
C-series PLCs, refer to Chapter 8 - CX-Net Network Configuration Tool. Use the following procedure to edit the
Unit Setup.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
Highlight the rack/unit in the IO Table tree.
Click the right-mouse button and select Unit Setup.
Set the required unit setup options for the specified rack/unit.
Note:
The availability of the Unit Setup option depends on the rack/unit selected. The SIOUs
attached to a PLC are shown in the IO Table component.
The PLC Communications Unit Setup dialog allows both the system and software switch memory areas associated
with a mounted Special Input/Output unit (SIOU) to be configured.
Software Switches
The Software Switch settings for a selected rack IO option can be edited for CV-series and CS/CJ/CP series PLCs.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 26
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 3 – IO Table Component
OMRON
For CV-series PLCs, the Software Switch settings appear in the IO Table tree as SIOU Units. For CS/CJ/CP series
PLCs, the Software Switch settings appear in the IO Table tree as part of the Main Rack information.
The dialog which is presented for software switch setup depends upon the type of the SIOU and allows the software
switch memory area associated with a mounted SIOU to be configured. Software switches provide status
information on each SIO unit on the PLC.
Note:
It is also possible to edit the Inner Board software switches for the CS/CJ series PLC if
fitted by selecting Inner Board Software Switches option from the PLC’s context menu.
The Software Switch dialog is displayed allowing the network unit system memory area to be configured and
transferred to the PLC. Software switches can be defined for the following:
♦
SYSMAC LINK. Allows set up of Data Link (on/off) and Internode Test (on/off) and setting of response
monitor time;
♦
SYSMAC NET. Allows set up of Data Link (on/off) and Internode Test; (on/off);
♦
Ethernet. Allows set up of Internode Test (on/off) and setting of response monitor time.
♦
Controller Link. Allows the polling status of the node to be set (whether it is a polling or polled unit) and
whether to clear the Controller Link unit EPROM.
Use the following procedure to edit the Software Switch Setup.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
Highlight the rack/unit in the IO Table tree.
Click the right-mouse button and select Software Switches.
Set the required software switch setup options for the specified rack/unit.
General
The General tab of the Software Switches dialog provides the complete software switches settings for a Basic unit,
PC unit, Mini-map unit, Host Link unit, Motion Control unit, ME-Net unit, DeviceNet Master unit and ISO Baud
unit. It also serves as partial software switches settings for other units.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Access the Software Switch dialog for an appropriate rack/unit.
Set the required CIO and DM area address in the CIO Address field and DM Address field.
Data Link Area
The Data Link tab is used to control whether Data Link is generated automatically or by a specific Data Link table
for SYSMAC LINK, SYSMAC NET and Controller Link. This setup is only used if the Node Type is Master. The
list box at the bottom of the chapter is only used when Data Link is set to one of the automatic options (i.e. not
specific).
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Transfer from PLC from the Options menu to transfer the current system area settings
from the unit.
Select the required unit and click the right-mouse button. Select the Software Switches
setting.
Adjust the settings as required.
Select Transfer to PLC from the Options menu to transfer the network parameters to the
unit.
Select the Reset Unit setting to restart the unit - the written settings are activated in the unit.
Note:
If the unit which is being set is the one on which the current communication to the PLC
is being made, the PLC needs to be closed and opened before communications can
continue.
Ethernet
The Ethernet setup differs from SYSMAC LINK, SYSMAC NET and Controller Link by not having a Data Link
Area setup and by having two further dialog boxes, the IP Address Table and IP Router Table. This particular
interface requires that each device attached to the network has an IP address, and that routing information for
directing data across the network is also included (where necessary); such address information ensures that data is
transmitted correctly between two nodes.
Note:
Table information is only used if the IP Address Conv. Method radio button is not set to
Auto.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 27
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 3 – IO Table Component
OMRON
The File Transfer Protocol (FTP) allows access to a file card on the PLC. If a FTP login name and password are
entered then these are used to start an FTP session. For more information, refer to the Ethernet User’s Manual.
The IP Address Table dialog allows the IP address of a network node to be entered.
Select the Ethernet Unit from the IO Table and click the right-mouse button.
Select the Unit Setup option.
Click on the Insert pushbutton.
Enter the IP Address for the node in the IP Address field; each of the four fields must take a
value in the range 0 to 255.
5. Select the OK pushbutton to proceed.
6. Click on the Delete pushbutton to remove the address from the table.
7. Select Transfer from PLC from the Options menu to write the changes back to the table.
The IP Router Table establishes communications between different networks by maintaining the IP address for
each interface and is created by clicking on the Insert pushbutton above the IP Router table dialog. Procedures are
the same as for the IP Address Table described above.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
Syslink Unit and Controller Link Specific Settings
A Syslink unit Software Switches dialog includes a General tab and Data Link tab described previously.
The Error Information tab provides read-only information regarding the errors that the PLC can detect and raise an
error flag.
The Network Status tab provides network status information. It also activates the PLC to perform internode tests.
Select the Start option to set the PLC to check for errors and report them. Select the Stop option to stop the PLC
from detecting errors. The Network Node List field lists the network nodes and whether they are participating in the
network operations.
Sysmac-Bus2 Unit Specific Settings
A Sysmac-Bus2 unit Software Switches dialog includes a General tab described previously.
The Slave tab provides specific status information to the Sysmac-Bus2 unit. There are various types of slave that
may be connected to a Remote IO Master unit. These slaves include IO Terminals, Programmable Displays and
Remote IO Slave units.
To view the slaves connected for a group, select the Group required from the field at the top of the Slaves tab. The
remainder of the Slaves tab displays the Node and Status for each category.
If the hierarchy of the IO Table has been expanded, the three groups can be populated with other units:
♦
Group 1. 16-point and 32-point IO units.
♦
Group 2. 16-point, 32-point, 64-point and 128-point IO units and 256-point dummy.
♦
Group 3. 58M Remote Terminal, 54MH Remote Terminal and 122M Remote Terminal.
Serial Communications Unit Specific Settings
Serial Communications unit specific software switches settings can only be set for CS/CJ/CP series PLCs.
A Serial Communications unit Software Switches dialog includes a General tab described previously.
The Port 1 tab and Port 2 tab are identical. Settings can be specified for the Format field, Mode field and Hardware
field.
Displaying Unit Error Log in the IO Table
By selecting a CPU Bus Unit or Special IO Unit in the IO table tree and clicking the right mouse button to select the
Unit Error Log Menu, the error log for the selected Unit can be displayed (CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or later).
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 28
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 3 – IO Table Component
OMRON
IO Table Management
Changes made to an IO Table can be done by simply editing particular fields in the table. Basic information can be
changed by displaying the configuration, selecting the rack or unit that needs to be changed and editing or selecting
the new IO address or configuration information.
All slot allocations in the IO Table can be cleared. Select Clear from the Options menu.
An IO Table unit in the PLC’s Registered IO Table in the PLC can be deleted. Use the following procedure to
delete an IO Table Unit.
1. Highlight the rack/unit in the IO Table to be deleted.
2. Click the right-mouse button and select Delete.
The CX-Server IO Table component can be examined to determine if it has a valid configuration. To check an IO
Table, select the Check option from the Options menu. A message is displayed indicating whether the operation
was successful or not.
1, 2, 3…
The CX-Server IO Table component can compare the local IO Table on the PC with the CX-Server project settings
and displays any differences or errors. Select the Compare with Project option from the Options menu.
PC to PLC Communications
The IO Table component permits the transferring of data to and from the PLC and allows comparisons to be made
between data stored on the PC and the PLC.
Note:
If the CX-Programmer is Ver. 6.0 or later and the PLC is a CS/CJ/CP-series PLC, the
Special I/O Unit and CPU Bus Unit parameter settings can be transferred as well as the
I/O table.
Transfer an IO Table from a PLC
The Transfer from PLC option loads the Registered Table into the CX-Server IO Table, replacing the currently
displayed setup. The IO Table can also be part of a general transfer which may, for example, include transferring
program and memory data from the PLC. Use the following procedure to transfer an IO Table from the PLC.
1. Ensure the PLC is online before activating the IO Table component.
2. Select Transfer from PLC from the Options menu to transfer an IO Table from the PLC.
The IO Table component is refreshed with the details from the PLC.
1, 2, 3…
Note:
If only I/O Table is selected and only the I/O tables are uploaded from the actual PLC to
the computer, the settings in the Special I/O Units or CPU Bus Units on the computer
will be initialized. To maintain the same settings, save the Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus
Unit settings to a file by right-clicking the Unit in the I/O table and selecting Save
Parameters from the pop-up menu. Then, after uploading the I/O tables, read the settings
back from the file by right-clicking the Unit in the I/O table and selecting Load
Parameters from the pop-up menu.
Transfer an IO Table to a PLC
The Transfer to PLC option loads the CX-Server IO Table into the Registered Table: this is only available to
C2000, CV and CS1-series PLCs. The table can be transferred to the PLC at any time (when the PLC is online) but
the operation can be delayed until other configuration settings have been made and then the complete configuration
can be transferred to the PLC via the PLC Setup component. Use the following procedure to transfer an IO Table to
the PLC.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Ensure the PLC is online before activating the IO Table component.
Select Transfer to PLC from the Options menu to transfer an IO Table to the PLC.
Note:
If the PLC Setup area is either written to the PLC or to the IO Table area the PLC may
need to be powered down and powered up in order for settings take effect. If the settings
need to be changed without switching off the PLC, write the PLC Setup data first, then
either generate or write the IO Table. Refer to Chapter 4 - PLC Setup Component.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 29
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 3 – IO Table Component
OMRON
Comparing an IO Table
The Registered IO Table can be compared with the CX-Server IO Table and displays any differences. This option
is helpful to confirm that a table that has been set up in CX-Server and has been transferred to the PLC, agrees with
how the hardware is set up. Use the following procedure to compare a Registered IO Table with the CX-Server IO
Table.
1. Ensure the PLC is online before activating the IO Table component.
2. Select Compare with PLC from the Options menu.
Any differences (if any) are displayed in the IO Table component.
1, 2, 3…
Starting Specialized Support Tools
Starting Specialized Programming Support Tools (Supported When Support Tools Were Installed from CX-One)
When the CX-Programmer and other Programming Support Tools have been installed from the CX-One, the
Programming Support Tool specific to a particular Unit (Special I/O Unit or CPU Bus Unit) can be started directly
from the CS/CJ/CP I/O Table Window by right-clicking the desired Unit in the I/O table and selecting Start Special
Application from the pop-up menu.
♦
If the Unit is right-clicked in the I/O table and Start Special Application - Start with Settings Inherited is
selected, the PLC model information, Unit model, and online/offline status information will be passed to the
Programming Support Tool automatically when it starts.
♦
If the Unit is right-clicked in the I/O table and Start Special Application - Start Only is selected, the
Programming Support Tool will be started in the same way as it is from the Windows Start Menu.
The following diagram shows how each Programming Tool can be started and how the I/O Table Window can be
opened from the Programming Tool.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 30
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 3 – IO Table Component
OMRON
CX-One
CX-Programmer
I/O Table
CS/CJ/CP Series CPU Unit
Start Special Application
CPU Rack
Serial Communication Board/Unit
([email protected]@)
(CS1W/[email protected]@)
Position Control Unit
(CS1W/[email protected]@@)
Motion Control Unit
([email protected]@@)
FL-net Unit
(CS1W/[email protected]@)
Loop Control Unit/Board
(CS1W-LC001/[email protected]@)
Loop CPU Unit
([email protected]@P)
Process CPU Unit
([email protected]@P)
The I/O Table
Window can be
opened only when
online.
CX-Position
MECHATROLINK-II Position Control Unit
([email protected]@)
MECHATROLINK-II Motion
Unit
(CS1W/[email protected]@)
CX-Protocol
CX-Motion-NCF
CX-Motion
Control
CX-Motion-MCH
CX-FLnet
CX-Process Support Software
The I/O Table
Window can be
opened only when
online.
CS/CJ-series CPU
Unit
Ethernet Unit
(CS1W/[email protected]@)
CX-Integrator
The CX-Programmer can be
started from a CS/CJ-series
PLC in the Network
Configuration Window.
Controller Link Unit
(CS1W/[email protected]@)
SYSMAC LINK Unit
([email protected]@)
The I/O Table Window
can be opened only
when online.
DeviceNet Unit
(CS1W/[email protected]@)
Profibus-DP Master Unit
([email protected]@)
Note:
With some of the Programming Tools (CX-Integrator, CX-Protocol, and CX-Process
Tool), the I/O Table Window can be opened from the Programming Tool as shown by
the dotted lines above, but only when the PLC is online.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 31
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 3 – IO Table Component
OMRON
PLC Specific Features
A number of features specific to types of PLC are described in the following paragraphs.
Hot Swapping
Hot swapping is permitted for C1000H/C2000H PLCs and allows modules to be changed without having to power
down. The modules swapped must be identical. To Hot Swap, select the Hot Swap option from the Options menu.
Note:
With a CS1D or CVM1D CPU Unit, hot swapping (i.e., online replacement) is possible
during operation for Basic I/O Units and, for the CS1D, Special I/O Units and CPU Bus
Units as well. Open the I/O tables for the project, select the Unit to be replaced, and
select Hot Swap from the Options menu. Click the Start Hot Swap button, remove the
old Unit, mount the new Unit and click the End Hot Swap button. Perform this operation
for each Unit to be replaced.
Note:
Online replacement is possible for a CS1D or CVM1D CPU Unit in any operating mode.
Use the following settings in the Change PLC dialog box.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 32
CPU Unit being used
PLC type selection list
CPU Unit model
CS1D
CS1H-H
CPU65 or CPU67
CVM1D
CVM1-V2
CPU21
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 3 – IO Table Component
OMRON
Setting Rack Start Addresses
This option is only available to CV-series PLCs and CS1-series PLCs. Use the following procedure to set Rack
Start Addresses.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Select Rack Start Addresses from the Option menu. The Rack Start Addresses dialog box is
displayed.
Enter the addresses for each rack as required. Select the OK pushbutton to accept the
settings or select the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation.
Note:
1. For CS1-H, CJ1-H, CJ1M, and CS1D CPU Units in the CS- and CJ-series PLCs,
select Options | Rack/Slot Start Address and the following dialog box will appear.
Note:
2. Select Slot Start Address Settings and click the OK button. The Slot Start Addresses
Settings dialog box shown below will appear.
Note:
3. The start address for a Rack and slot number can be specified.
This can be used, for example, to allocate fixed addresses to Input Units and Output
Units. Note: The start address information set for Racks and slots can be downloaded
and uploaded for the CPU Unit.
4. For CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 2.0 or later with CX-Programmer Ver. 4.0 or later,
up to 64 sets of rack/slot numbers and start addresses can be set.
Units Profile Information
For CS1-series PLCs, SIOU’s, CPU SIOU’s and other units, unit manufacturing information can be retrieved, the
data read and comments saved against each unit to a Compact Flash disk when fitted. Use the following procedure
to view the unit manufacturing details:
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Highlight the PLC name and click the right-mouse button.
Select Unit Manufacturing Information and then either CPU Unit or Inner Board
Note: An error is displayed if the unit does not support manufacturing information. The
unit version for CS/CJ/CP-series Units can be checked in the Unit Manufacturing
Information (CX-Programmer Ver.4.0 or later only).
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 33
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 4 – PLC Setup Component
OMRON
CHAPTER 4
PLC Setup Component
This chapter describes the PLC Setup component and the procedures involved in changing a PLC’s settings both
offline and online.
The PLC Setup component allows the PLC settings to be entered for individual C-series PLCs, CV-series PLCs or
CS1 PLCs. More than one PLC Setup component can be opened at any one time allowing a number of PLCs to be
configured simultaneously.
Once a PLC has been defined in a project in terms of name, device type and network type, changing various settings
allows the PLC behavior to be altered. Options can also be selected to check the PLC is functioning correctly.
The tabbed PLC settings component shows only options available for the selected PLC. Some options will be
greyed out in instances where they are not applicable to the PLCs current state.
The status bar displays the PLC and CPU type and the operational mode of the PLC.
Note:
When configuring a PLC it is advisable to have the PLC operational manual available
for reference. A warning is displayed before any changes are made to a PLC’s current
state. This gives the option of cancelling the procedure.
Note:
The information provided in this chapter is not definitive because of the wide variety of
PLCs and their differing nature - even within the same PLC series. Consult the relevant
PLC operating manual for specific PLC settings information.
The PLC Setup component can be forced to stay as the top window by selecting the Always on top option from the
Options menu.
For Moving, resizing, maximising, minimising and closing windows, refer to Microsoft Windows online help.
Access to the PLC Setup component is from the invoking application and also via the CX-Net Network
Configuration Tool, refer to Chapter 8 - CX-Net Network Configuration Tool for further information.
To close the PLC Setup dialog, select the Close button in the title bar.
CS/CJ/CP-Series PLC Settings
The following paragraphs describe the features of the PLC Setup component associated with CS/CJ/CP-series
PLCs. Refer to Chapter 4 - PC to PLC Communications for details of transferring PLC setup information to and
from the PLC.
The common Set Default option resets PLC Setup component values to the default settings.
PLC Startup
The PLC Startup tab of the PLC Setup component allows certain PLC settings to be made which always take effect
on startup (until they are explicitly altered). Use the following procedure to apply settings in the PLC Startup tab.
Startup Hold
The Hold area in the PLC’s Work Area Memory retains the status when either the operating mode is changed,
power is interrupted or the PLC operation is stopped. You can select one or all the following options for the hold
area to retain.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Force Status Hold Bit - Specifies that the status of the forced status hold bit is to be
maintained (ticked) or reset to OFF when power is next turned on.
IOM Hold Bit - Specifies that the status of the IOM hold bit is to be maintained (ticked) or
reset to OFF when power is next turned on.
Mode
This selects the default PLC operation mode when the PLC is powered on:
♦
Program - Select this for online programming when the PLC is powered on.
♦
Monitor - Select this to start monitoring the running program when the PLC is powered on.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 35
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 4 – PLC Setup Component
♦
OMRON
Run - Select this to run the PLC’s program when the PLC is powered on.
♦
Use Programming Console - This is the default setting that allows you to select the operating mode when
online.
In addition to the above, the following settings are available for CJ1-H, CS1-H, and CP1H PLCs.
Execution Settings
For the CJ1-H, CS1-H, and CP1H PLCs series PLCs set the Execution Setting options as appropriate.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Run program when initialize unit/board. Check the tick box to select this option.
Service for units when Inner Board recognition. Check the tick box to select this option.
Settings
The Settings tab of the PLC Setup component allows execution processes and controls to be defined and EM
allocation to be enabled.
Note:
For CS1-H, CJ1-H, and CP1H PLCs only, this tab is called CPU Settings.
Execute Process
Use the following procedure to apply Execute Process settings.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
Low Battery Enabled - Select (tick) this option to flag when CPU Unit battery errors are
detected.
Interrupt Task Enabled - When this option is selected interrupt task errors will be detected.
Stop CPU Error Enabled - Select this option to determine if instruction errors (instruction
processing errors (ER) and illegal access errors (AER)) are to treated as non-fatal or fatal
errors.
Don't register FAL to error log - Select this option (tick) to stop registering FAL to error
log.
Memory Allocation
CS/CJ-series PLCs can select either Memory Card or EM (Expansion Memory) specified file area. Each time EM
is selected, the EM is reformatted automatically.
To use EM rather than Memory Card, select the EM File Setting enabled setting and enter the EM Start File No.
CS/CJ-series PLCs can use EM as file memory, either as or as well as Compact Flash disk. When transferred to the
PLC, EM is formatted.
In addition to the above, the following settings are also available for CJ1-H and CS1-H PLCs.
Background Execution
1, 2, 3… 1. Table data process instructions. Check the tick box enable Table date process instructions.
2. String data process instructions - Select (tick) this option to enable String data process
instructions.
3. Data shift process instructions - Select (tick) this option to enable Data shift process
instructions.
4. Com port number - Enter a number between 1 and 7 inclusive, to set the Com port you wish
to connect by.
Caution: Entering a com port number higher than the number of ports actually available will
prevent future connections to that PLC.
Timings
The PLC Timings tab of the PLC Setup component allows cycle, interrupt and event timings to be defined. Use the
following procedure when applying settings in the PLC Timings tab for standard CS/CJ/CP-series PLCs. When
setting the timings for other PLC types follow the on-screen instructions.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Check the Watch Cycle Time setting and set the watch cycle time if enabled for the PLC; the
default is 0 ms.
Deselect the Set Time to all Events setting to enter a time period for all event processes; this
is entered as a percentage of the total cycle time.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 36
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 4 – PLC Setup Component
OMRON
3.
4.
5.
Check the Power Off Interrupt setting, and set if enabled for the PLC; the default is 0ms.
Set the Cycle Time setting to define the time interval for cycles.
Set the Scheduled Interrupt Interval setting to schedule interrupts to occur at regular
intervals; either every 10 ms or a specific value can be set.
SIOU Refresh
The SIOU Refresh tab of the PLC Setup component allows SIOU Status to be enabled. Check the required Enable
SIOU Status setting for each SIOU in the field.
Unit Settings
The Unit Settings tab of the PLC Setup component allows timings for the individual rack slots associated with the
PLC to be set. Select the required slot(s) from the rack field and the required unit setting; the default is 8 ms.
Host Link Port
The Host Link Port tab of the PLC Setup component defines the protocol which allows transferring data between
the PLC and the host PC. The default settings may be used or an alternative communications protocol defined.
Some of the options may not be applicable depending on the device type selected. Use the following procedure to
apply settings in the Host Link Port tab.
The Port Settings default is 9,600 bps, 1 start bit, 7-bit data, 2 stop bits and Even parity.
Customised port settings can be entered by deselecting the Default setting.
2. Select the CTS Control setting to enable use of CTS.
3. Set the Unit Number setting for the selected PLC.
4. Set the Delay value; a pre-set transmission delay in the range 0000 to 9999 (for BCD this is
in 10 ms units).
The following entries cannot be amended:
1, 2, 3…
1.
♦
Link Words. These word addresses are fixed at LR00 to LR63 (or bit addresses from LR0000 to LR6315).
♦
Start Code and End Code. The message start and end codes.
♦
NT Link Max.
Peripheral Port
The Peripheral Port tab of the PLC Setup component defines the connection between the PC and PLC. The default
settings may be used or an alternative communications protocol defined. Use the following procedure to apply
settings in the Peripheral Port tab.
1, 2, 3…
1.
The Port Settings default to 9600 bps, 1 start bit, 7-bit data, 2 stop bits and Even parity.
Customised port settings can be entered by deselecting the Default setting.
2.
Set the Unit Number setting for the selected PLC.
The NT Link Max setting cannot be amended.
Peripheral Service
Note that this tab is only available for the CS1-H and CJ1-H PLCs (CS1G-H, CS1H-H, CJ1G-H and CJ1H-H).
The tabbed dialog is split into three sections as follows:
Sync/Async Comms
Execution Mode - The default for this option is Not Specified, and as such means that all other parts are disabled
except for Set time to all events.
Select one option from the list to set the execution mode. Choosing Not Specified will disable all the options within
the Peripheral Service dialog, except for 'Set time to all events'. Not Specified is the only way of setting the
Peripheral Service Execution Time to zero.
If Peripheral Service is chosen, editing Peripheral Service Execution Time is possible, and the system sets the
default to 0.1. See also Instruction Processing (Peripheral Service Execution Time).
Specifying Asynchronous will disable the same options as Not Specified, and set the Execution mode to
Asynchronous processing. Synchronous likewise sets the Execution Mode to Synchronous processing.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 37
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 4 – PLC Setup Component
OMRON
Peripheral Service Mode
Instruction Execution Time - A value within and including the range of 5 to 255 or 0 can be entered as a valid
setting.
Peripheral Service Execution Time - A value within and including 0.1 to 25.5 can be entered as a valid setting. For
more information on when this option is available, see Sync/Async Comms, Execution Mode, above.
Target Unit (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) and SIOU - The default for this setting is Not Specified. There are five possible options
for this setting. After Not Specified, the next option is CPU SIOU. If this option is selected, the SIOU number
should be entered in the box to the right marked 'SIOU'. The next option is SIOU, and likewise with the CPU SIOU
option, the SIOU number should be entered in the box to the right marked 'SIOU'. The three remaining options
allow either the Inner Board, Host Link Port or Peripheral Port to be set as the 'Target Unit'.
Set time to all events
Set time to all events (default 4%) - By ticking the checkbox, the default as stated above will be set. If the checkbox
is not ticked, then a value between 0 and 255 inclusive can be entered, making a maximum setting of 25.5 (255
*0.1). This option is found in the Timings tab for all other CS/CJ-series PLCs.
Duplex Settings
The Duplex Setting tab is activated by selecting the Duplex Settings option from the PLC Settings Options menu.
With this option checked, use the Tabs scroll buttons to scroll to the right and click on the Duplex Settings tab to
bring it to the front. The options in this dialog can now be set to provide the appropriate communications setup
within the selected Communications Units. The dialog is divided into five sections as follows:
Note: The Duplex Setting tab is available for CS1H-H 65 & 67 PLCs but is only applicable to the CS1D series
PLCs.
Operation Settings
Run under Duplex Initial – This option should be selected if it is required to run two Units in parallel with Duplex
Initial execution. Note that this setting only takes effect at startup or at the start of an operation. It cannot be
changed during an operation.
Return Automatically – Select this option when it is required to execute a process that returns to Duplex Operation
automatically.
Communications Unit Duplex Setting
From the list of Communications Units select those that are to be run in duplex mode. If more than one Unit is set
to duplex mode the options selected will be applied to each Unit. It is not possible to set different options for
different Communications Units. To execute the Communication Duplex operation an IO table must be created or
transferred. Note that this setting only takes effect at startup or at the start of an operation. It cannot be changed
during an operation.
Hot Swap
Allow Plural Units - Selecting this option enables Units operating in Parallel or Duplex mode to be replaced while
online. The Units, which can be exchanged while online are, Basic IO Units, SIOUs, and CPU SIOUs of the
CS-Series PLCs. Note that this option can be selected while online.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 38
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 4 – PLC Setup Component
OMRON
STB Serial Settings
Allow STB-COMM – Selecting this option will enable the Host Link Port of the Standby CPU. This option should
not be selected if it is required to continue with communications when changing from Duplex operation to Standby
operation.
CPU Unit Duplex Transfer Settings
Transfer Program – This option should be selected if it is required to skip the Transferring Program area at Duplex
Initial operation after exchanging CPU units, (Verify will be executed). If programs can be matched beforehand,
use this setting to reduce the Duplex Initial Operation time.
EM Division Transmission – This option should be selected when it is required to transfer Duplex Initial data in
specified EM sizes. If the option is not selected the complete EM area will be transferred at once. Note that this may
cause the cycle time to be expanded for a short time.
Division Size – If the EM Division Transmission option has been selected the value entered for the division size
will determine the size of the EM area to transfer. Note that this setting only takes effect at startup or at the start of
an operation. It cannot be changed during an operation.
Transfer Parameter Area of Inner board – Select this option when it is required to transfer the Parameter Area of
the inner board between Units.
Transfer Variable Area of Inner board – Select this option when it is required to transfer the Variable Area of the
inner board between Units.
CV-Series PLC Settings
The following paragraphs describe the features of the PLC Setup component associated with CV-series PLCs.
Refer to Chapter 4 - PC to PLC Communications for details of transferring PLC setup information to and from the
PLC.
The common Set Default option resets PLC Setup component values to the default settings.
PLC Startup
The PLC Startup tab of the PLC Setup component allows certain PLC settings to be made which always takes
effect on startup (until they are explicitly altered). Some of the options may not be applicable depending on the
device type selected. Use the following procedure to apply settings in the PLC Startup tab.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The status of the Force Status Hold setting, IOM Hold Bit setting and Restart Continuation
Bit setting in the Startup Hold area of the PLC’s Work Area memory can be set so that they
are either maintained or reset to OFF on power up.
When power is restored after an interruption, the IO Bits setting and Power-On Status
setting must be selected and the PLC startup mode must be set to Run or Monitor.
Set the Mode setting to either Program, Monitor, Run, Debug or Use Programming
Console. The default mode is Program.
Set the Display Mode setting. The 7-segment display of the IO Interface units, IO Control
unit and SYSMAC BUS/2 Remote IO Slave units can be set to one of three modes. The
mode is indicated by the position of the decimal point.
♦
Mode 1. Displays the first IO word allocated to the rack (000 indicates an error). This is the
default mode.
♦
Mode 2. Displays the CPU operating status (A or -) and error status
(E, F or -), peripheral connection and rack number.
♦
Mode 3. Displays a 4-character message when the IODP (189) instruction is executed in the
unit’s program.
Check the Automatically Transfer User Program setting to automatically transfer the user
program from one of the PLCs memory cards when the PLC starts-up.
Check the Display modes at startup setting to display all selected modes on startup.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 39
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 4 – PLC Setup Component
OMRON
Error Log
The Error Log tab permits certain settings to be applied to error logging. Either Data Memory (DM) or Extended
Memory (EM) areas can be selected to hold the PLC’s Error Log. Refer to Chapter 6 - PLC Error Component for
a description of the Error Log. Use the following procedure to apply settings in the Error Log tab.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the Enable Error Log setting to enable error logging. If this is not selected, the
default log auxiliary memory is assigned.
Enter the Start Address setting for the error log. This is only enabled if the Enable Error Log
setting has been selected.
Enter the EM Bank Number setting if the Error Log is to be stored on an installed Extended
Memory Card. The Start Address setting needs to be set to the relevant area of EM. This is
only enabled if the Enable Error Log setting has been selected.
Enter the Number of Records setting for the number of records to be held in the PLC Error
component.
Note:
An Error Log in the Auxiliary Area (words A100-A199 for CV1000) can contain up to
20 error records. To increase the size of the log (to 2047 records), move it to either the
DM or EM areas.
Execution Controls
Instructions can be executed and peripheral servicing performed by either using:
♦
Event driven (asynchronous) processing mode. The peripheral servicing process interrupts the execution
process cycle by sending IO refresh requests.
or
♦ Synchronised processing mode. The execution and peripheral servicing processes wait for each other to
complete the task in hand.
Consult the PLC operational manual for details when defining the execution controls. Use the following procedure
to apply settings in the Execution Controls tab.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
An operand can be indirectly addressed via the DM area in either Binary or BCD. Select the
Binary setting or the BCD setting as required.
Set the Step Timer setting for the SFC step instructions. The default is 0.1 s.
Note:
For CV1000, CV2000 and CVM1/CPU21-EV2 PLCs, EM can be used for indirect
addressing of an operand.
Note:
The Step Timer setting is not available to CVM1 PLCs.
Execution Controls 1
Use the following procedure to apply settings.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the Measure CPU-Bus Unit Cycle setting for the CPU to measure the service cycle.
Check the Detect Low Battery setting to flag PLC and Memory Card low battery.
Check the CPU standby on initialisation of bus units setting to ensure the CPU remains in
standby until SYSMAC BUS/2 terminators are detected. If this is not checked, PLC
operation begins regardless of the presence of terminators.
Check the Error on power off interrupts setting to ignore a momentary power interruption
(and not generate an error) or leave unchecked to generate an error on power off.
Execution Controls 2
Check the following settings as required.
♦
The Duplication action error setting.
♦
The Multiple JMP000 use setting.
♦
The Run program on IO verify error setting.
♦
The Startup trace setting.
♦
The Nest IO interrupts setting.
♦
The IO Interrupt setting.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 40
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 4 – PLC Setup Component
OMRON
Host Link Port
The Host Link Port tab of the PLC Setup component defines the protocol which allows transferring data between
the PLC and the host PC. The default settings may be used or an alternative communications protocol defined.
Use the following procedure to apply settings in the Host Link Port tab.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
The Port Settings default to 9600 bps, 1 start bit, 7-bit data, 2 stop bits and Even parity.
Select a Unit Number setting for the Host Link port setting. This has a maximum value of
31.
IO Refresh
The IO Refresh tab of the PLC Setup component allows the specification of refreshes and their definition as either
timed or immediate refreshes. Some of the options may not be applicable depending on the device type selected.
Use the following procedure to apply settings in the IO Refresh tab.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the Zero-cross setting to ensure output devices accurately switch on/off high power
devices when minimum current is flowing (when the AC power supply crosses zero).
Check the Cyclic setting to generate a cyclic refresh at the end of program execution.
Check the Scheduled setting to specify a time interval between interrupt refreshes. This is in
the range 0 ms to 120 ms.
Check the Immediate Refresh setting to allow program instructions to be set to interrupt for
immediate refreshing. The Scheduled refresh setting must be set to 00 ms.
Note:
Scheduled refreshing is not available if the PLC is set for synchronous operation.
Address Enable
The Address Enable tab of the PLC Setup component allows addresses to be entered for selected local racks. Some
of the options may not be applicable depending on the device type selected. Use the following procedure to apply
settings in the Address Enable tab.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
Enter an address for each required Local rack setting. The first word can be set between 0
and 511. Word allocations must not overlap. The default for the CPU rack is zero. If word
allocations overlap, they are ignored and the address returns to zero. Racks selected without
a designated first word is allocated words automatically beginning from CIO 0000.
Enter the Group 1 and Group 2 values. This is the first word between CIO 0000 and CIO
0999 for each SYSMAC BUS/2 Group 1 and 2 Masters.
Enter the Group 3 values. These are the first word for each SYSMAC BUS/2 Group 3 Slave
between CIO 0000 and CIO 0999 for each SYSMAC BUS/2 Group 1 and 2 Masters and the
first word for each SYSMAC BUS/2 Slave rack between CIO 0000 and CIO 2555.
Enter the RT Terminals, SIOU and IO terminals addresses as required.
Note:
Each group (Group 1, 2 and 3) has pre-set values assigned as a default. Group 1 and
Group 2 supports 32 and 16 IO units respectively. Group 3 is reserved for racks and
supports eight racks, each of which supports eleven slots.
PLC Timings
The PLC Timings tab of the PLC Setup component allows cycle, interrupt and event times to be set. Use the
following procedure to apply settings in the PLC Timings tab.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the Watch Cycle Time setting and set the watch cycle time if enabled for the PLC; the
default is 1000 ms.
Check the Power Off Interrupt setting, and set if enabled for the PLC; the default is 0 ms.
Set the Cycle Time setting to define the time interval for cycles.
Set the Scheduled Interrupt Interval setting to schedule interrupts to occur at regular
intervals; either every 10 ms or a specific value can be set.
Hold
The Hold tab of the PLC Setup component allows the Hold area of the PLC’s Work Area memory to be defined.
Use the following procedure to apply settings in the Hold tab.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 41
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 4 – PLC Setup Component
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
OMRON
Check the Enable Hold Area setting to enable the Hold area and select its Start and End
Address settings.
Check the required racks from the CPU field.
Check the required Sysbus/2 remote master from the Sysbus/2 Remote Master field.
Check the required Sysbus remote master from the Sysbus Remote Master field.
C-Series PLC Settings
The following paragraphs describe the features of the PLC Setup component associated with C-series PLCs. Refer
to Chapter 4 - PC to PLC Communications for details of transferring PLC setup information to and from the PLC.
The common Set Default option resets PLC Setup component values to the default settings.
PLC Startup
The PLC Startup tab of the PLC Setup component allows certain PLC settings to be made which always take effect
on startup (until they are explicitly altered). Use the following procedure to apply settings in the PLC Startup tab.
Mode
This option selects the default PLC operation mode when the PLC is powered on.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Program – Select this for online programming when the PLC is powered on.
Monitor – Select this to start monitoring the running program when the PLC is powered on.
Run – Select this to run the PLC’s program when the PLC is powered on.
Pre-Powerdown mode – In this mode the PLC uses the operating mode last used before the
power was turned off.
Use Programming Console – This is the default setting that allows you to select the
operating mode when online.
SIOU
The SIOU Area DM settings are highly PLC specific and are dependent upon PLC selected and the SIOU mode.
Refer to the online help for detailed information.
IOM
This option specifies that the status of the IOM hold bit is to be reset to OFF (ticked) or maintained when power is
next turned on.
Forced Status
This option specifies that the status of the forced status hold bit is to be reset to OFF (ticked) or maintained when
power is next turned on.
Console Language
Select the Console language to either English or Japanese as appropriate (CPM1/1A only).
Expansion Instructions
Set to either Default or User Settings. This option is only available for SRM1, CPM2* PLCs.
CompoBus/S Devices (CPM2*-S*)
Select the Maximum number of CompoBus and S Devices to either 16 or 32.
Communications Mode (CPM2*-S*)
Sets the communications mode to either High-Speed or Long-distance.
Memory Error on Capacitor Failure
Select this option if a memory error on capacitor failure is to be recorded.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 42
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 4 – PLC Setup Component
OMRON
Cycle Time
The Cycle Time tab of the PLC Setup component allows the total cycle time for the CPU unit to be defined. This
period is the time taken to complete monitoring, program execution and IO port servicing. Use the following
procedure to apply settings in the Cycle Time tab.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
Cycle Monitor Time setting. This option sets the time allowed for the CPU unit to cycle
through the type of operations indicated above. If it is exceeded, an error is generated and
the CPU unit is stopped.
Cycle Time setting. Use this option to define a minimum cycle time by selecting a time
period in the range 1 to 9,999 ms. The default is Variable (with the CPU calculating the
cycle time in each cycle).
Servicing Time setting. This option allows the percentage of the defined cycle time which
can be used to service a port to be set. It can be set for the Peripheral Port, RS232C Port,
Comms Port A and Comms Port B.
Note:
The Cycle Time setting is ignored if the Cycle Monitor Time setting is longer and vice
versa (provided a minimum time has been defined). The CPU unit waits until the longer
of the two time periods has elapsed before starting the next cycle.
Interrupt/Refresh
The Interrupt/Refresh tab of the PLC Setup component allows certain PLCs to interrupt the main program by input
and scheduled interrupts in order to call a subroutine. Use the following procedure to apply settings in the
Interrupt/Refresh tab.
Interrupt Response - Set the interrupt mode to High Speed to interrupt immediately or to
Normal to wait for the current process to complete.
2. SIOU Refresh setting - This option must be set to Disable Refresh when the Interrupt
Response setting is set to High Speed (if the Disable Refresh setting has been set and the
Interrupt Response is set to Normal, the Disable Refresh setting is ignored).
3. Schedule Interrupt Unit setting - These are interrupts for which you can select regular
intervals of either a fixed 10ms duration or Set in increments of 1 ms.
4. SIOU Cyclic Refresh setting - Set the SIOU Cyclic Refresh setting if required. An SIOU
Cyclic Refresh Unit(s) must be specified if an SIOU refresh setting has been made.
The CQM1 PLCs support input and scheduled interrupts to stop the main program to run a subroutine.
1, 2, 3…
1.
The following Interrupt/Refresh options are available with the CQM1H.
5.
6.
7.
Interrupt Enable – This option allows you to set the various IR value interrupts to either:
Normal (default), Interrupt or Quick.
Input Constant - This option allows you to set the input constant of IR000 Bits. Select the
value in milliseconds as appropriate.
Pulse Output 0/1 Unit – Set the output pulse 0 and 1 to either Relative or Absolute.
Port Settings
The Peripheral Port, Comms Board A, Comms Board B and Host Link Port tabs of the PLC Setup component
defines the settings for the connection between the PC and PLC. The default settings may be used or an alternative
communications protocol defined. Use the following procedure to apply settings.
1, 2, 3…
1.
The Port Settings are set to 9600 bps, 1 start bit, 7-bit data, 2 stop bits and Even parity.
Customised port settings can be entered by deselecting the Default setting. The Mode
setting can be set to one of the following connection types:
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 43
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 4 – PLC Setup Component
OMRON
♦
PC.
♦
Hostlink 1 to n. Multiple PLC RS422/485 connections to the PC.
♦
RS232C. Single PLC RS232 connection to a printer or from a reader.
♦
1-to-1 Link Slave. Sets PLC as slave in an RS232 PLC to PLC connection.
♦
1-to-1 Link Master. Sets PLC as master in an RS232 PLC to PLC connection.
♦
NT Link 1:1. For using NT link commands in an RS232 PLC to PT (Programmable Terminal)
connection.
♦
NT Link 1:n. For using NT link commands in an PLC to RS422/485 multi-PT connection.
♦
Protocol Macro 1:1. Single PLC RS232 to device connection.
♦
Protocol Macro 1:n. PLC to RS422/485 multi-device connections.
2.
3.
4.
Select the CTS Control setting to enable use of the CTS line on the PLC.
Set the Unit Number setting for the selected PLC.
Set the Delay setting; a pre-set transmission delay in the range 0000 to 9999 (for BCD this is
in 10ms units).
The following entries cannot be amended:
♦
Link Words. These word addresses are fixed at LR00 to LR63 (or bit addresses from LR0000 to LR6315).
♦
Start Code and End Code. The message start and end codes.
♦
NT Link Max.
Error Settings
The Error Settings tab of the PLC Setup component defaults to the detection and reporting of long cycle times,
interrupt errors and low battery condition. Use the following procedure to apply settings in the Error Settings tab.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
Cycle Time - Check the Do not detect long cycles option to stop detection and reporting of
long cycles.
Styles - Check the Do not store records option if records are not to be stored.
Battery - Check the Do not detect low battery option if low battery condition is not to be
reported on.
High Speed Counters
The CQM1H-CTB41 high-speed counter board is an Inner Board applicable to units CPU51 and CPU61. A
maximum of two boards can be mounted simultaneously in slots 1 & 2 of the PLC. The high-speed counter board
counts high-speed pulses from 50 to 500 kHz entering through ports 1 to 4. It performs tasks according to the
number of pulses counted.
When the present value of the high-speed counter matches a specified target value or lies within a specified range,
the bit pattern specified in the comparison table is stored in internal output bits and external output bits. A bit
pattern can be set for each comparison result and the external output bits can be output through an external output
terminal.
Up to four external outputs can be produced when either the target value is matched or a range comparison
condition is satisfied. The high-speed counter board does not provide high-speed counter interrupts, it simply
compares the present value to target values or comparison ranges and produces internal and external bit outputs.
CPM1/CPM1A PLCs have a high-speed counter function that can be used in incrementing mode or up/down mode.
The high-speed counter can be combined with input interrupts to perform target value control or zone comparison
control that is not affected by the PLCs cycle time. High-speed counter signals can be input to CPU bits 00000
through 00002. In incrementing mode, input 00001 can be used as a regular input.
High Speed Counter/Synchronised Pulse Control
Select the appropriate option to determine the parameters of the high speed counter. If the option ‘Don’t use either
function’ is selected the counter is disabled and the Counter Reset and Counter Mode option are disabled.
Counter Reset
Select the counter reset mode of operation, either Z phase and software reset or Software reset only.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 44
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 4 – PLC Setup Component
OMRON
Counter Mode
Select the appropriate option to determine the counters mode of operation.
Device Net
I/O Link Refresh Area
Note:
This tab is only available for the CPM2*-S* PLCs.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
Standard - Select this button to set the standard/default settings for the I/O Refresh Area.
Custom - Select this button to make your own settings.
Write: These setting are the same as Read, but without the option of selecting the 'AR'
memory area.
♦
Area - This option defaults to IR area 1, but can be set to IR area 2, DM area, LR area or HR area.
♦
Address - This is the beginning address number.
♦
Size - The default is 0. However, if the size is 0 for Write, then the size for Read must be 1, or
vice versa. Any custom setting's maximum value is determined by what the Area and Address
values before it were set to. For example, if IR area 1 is selected, and the maximum address is
specified (in this case max = 49), then the maximum size is 1. (The size value is specified in
Words).
Read: These setting are the same as Write, but with the additional option of being able to
selecting the 'AR' memory area for reading.
♦
Area - This option defaults to IR area 1, but can be set to IR area 2, DM area, LR area or HR area.
♦
Address - This is the beginning address number.
♦
Size - The default is 0. However, if the size is 0 for Write, then the size for Read must be 1, or
vice versa. Any custom setting's maximum value is determined by what the Area and Address
values before it were set to. For example, if IR area 1 is selected, and the maximum address is
specified (in this case max = 49), then the maximum size is 1. (The size value is specified in
Words).
PLC Status
These options determine the status of the PLC.
Append PLC Status on top of IN data - Select this button to Append PLC Status on top of IN data, or choose 'Do not
append PLC Status'.
Do not append PLC Status - Select this button to not append PLC Status on top of IN data, or choose 'Append PLC
Status on top of IN data'.
PC to PLC Communications
The PLC Setup component permits the transferring of data to and from the PLC and allows comparisons to be made
between data stored on the PC and the PLC.
Uploading PLC Settings
The Transfer from PLC option loads the settings from the PLC into the PLC Setup component. Use the following
procedure to upload PLC settings.
1. Ensure the PLC is online before activating the PLC Setup component.
2. Select Transfer from PLC from the Options menu. A confirmatory dialog is displayed.
The PLC Setup component is refreshed with the details from the PLC.
1, 2, 3…
Downloading PLC Settings
The Transfer to PLC option loads the settings to the PLC. Use the following procedure to download an IO Table.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Ensure the PLC is online before activating the PLC Setup component.
Select Transfer to PLC from the Options menu. A confirmatory dialog is displayed.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 45
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 4 – PLC Setup Component
OMRON
Comparing PLC Settings
The Verify option compares the settings on the PLC with those on the PLC. This option is helpful to confirm that a
table that has been set up in CX-Server and has been downloaded to the PLC, agrees with how the hardware is set
up. Use the following procedure to compare PLC settings.
1. Ensure the PLC is online before activating the IO Table component.
2. Select Verify from the Options menu.
Any differences (if any) are displayed in the PLC Setup component.
1, 2, 3…
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 46
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 5 – Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor Component
OMRON
CHAPTER 5
Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor Component
This chapter describes the Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor component and its ability to display either the PLCs
uploaded data trace buffer or monitored data obtained from the PLC’s memory areas during program execution.
Data held in a PLC’s memory areas can be monitored and traced during program execution. When displayed, this
information provides a valuable tool for analysing the program’s performance.
The Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor component has two separate modes of operation:
♦
Data Trace. The PLC can be configured to trace a number of channels and bits and can sample these when a
trigger condition is activated. When the PLC trace buffer is full or the user stops the trace, the trace buffer can
be uploaded and viewed – the trace however, is complete. Values do not change on the screen, all sampling is
achieved in the PLC and displayed when finished.
♦
Time Chart Monitor. A number of channels and bits can be configured and monitored online. The changing
values are displayed in the monitoring view as either a trend graph or histogram. A trigger condition can also
be set which resets the sampled amount of data. Monitoring continues until stopped by the user.
With the CX-Programmer version 6.0 and later versions, data collected by the Data Trace and Time Chart Monitor
functions can be saved in standard CSV files (with .csv filename extension). The data saved in standard CSV files
can be analysed and printed in programs such as Microsoft Excel.
The status bar provides instant help, the PLC and CPU type, the current operating mode of the PLC and the status
of the Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor component.
The Toolbar and status bar can both be turned on or off. Select Status Bar from the View menu to control the
display of the status bar. Select Toolbar from the View menu to control the display of the Data Trace/Time Chart
Monitor toolbar.
The Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor component can be forced to stay as the top window by selecting the Always on
top option from the Options menu.
For moving, resizing, maximising, minimising and closing windows, refer to Microsoft Windows online help.
Access to the Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor dialog is from the invoking application.
To close the Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor dialog, select the Close button in the title bar.
Sampling Ranges
The following paragraphs discuss sampling ranges specific to PLC series.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 47
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 5 – Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor Component
OMRON
CS/CJ-series PLC Sampling Range
The CS/CJ-series PLC can trace a maximum of 31 bits and 6 words and performs data tracing using one of the
following methods:
♦
Setting a timer interval. The trace can be performed in increments of 5ms during a 5-2550 ms cycle. To sample
data only once each cycle, set the interval to 0 ms.
♦
Including the TRSM (170) instruction in the PLC’s program. This instruction identifies the points in program
execution where specified data is to be stored in Trace Memory. The timer interval must be set to ‘TRSM’.
Note:
The buffer for Data Trace is 4K words.
CV-series PLC Sampling Range
The CV-series PLC can trace a maximum of 12 bits and 3 words and performs data tracing using one of the
following methods:
♦
Setting a timer interval. The trace can be performed in increments of 5 ms during a 5-2550 ms cycle.
♦
Including the TRSM(170) instruction in the PLC’s program. This instruction identifies the points in program
execution where specified data is to be stored in Trace Memory. The timer interval must be set to ‘TRSM’.
C-series PLC Sampling Range
The C-series PLC can trace a maximum of 12 bits and 3 words and performs data tracing using one of the following
methods:
♦
Setting a timer interval. A Data Trace can be performed at regular, independent intervals by setting a timer
interval from the peripheral device.
♦
Including the TRSM(45) instruction in the PLC’s program. This instruction identifies the points in program
execution where specified data is to be stored in Trace Memory.
Note:
Data Tracing cannot be performed from a Programming Console.
Setting Monitoring Conditions
The Data Trace or Time Chart Monitor must be activated before the settings can be configured. To select Data
Trace or Time Chart Monitoring mode, select the Mode option from the Operation menu followed by either Data
Trace or Time Chart Monitor.
Note:
The mode of the Data Trace/Time Chart monitor component is identified prior to
activation from the invoking application.
The Time Chart Monitor/Data Trace Configuration dialog allows the conditions for the Data Trace or Time Chart
Monitor to be set, i.e. specifying the data to be monitored, the intervals at which this is to occur and the trigger
conditions.
Use the following procedure to set conditions for the Data Trace or Time Chart Monitor modes.
1, 2, 3…
1.
Select the Configure Trace/Time Chart button from the toolbar.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 48
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 5 – Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor Component
OMRON
2.
Set the trigger condition that causes the data trace to start by selecting a Symbol/Address and
Value on the Trigger tab. Use the Browse pushbutton to insert a known symbol from the
invoking application. If a bit address is selected, the trigger is based on a falling or rising
edge as opposed to a particular value for a word address: the Value field changes to the Edge
field.
3. For Time Chart Monitor only, establish the sampling time and Buffer Size on the Sampling
tab.
4. Apply a delay value in the Delay field. A negative value in this field advances the start of the
trace before the trigger condition by the supplied interval value. A positive value in this field
delays the trace after the trigger condition by the supplied value in sampling.
5. Select the Word Addresses field on the Word Addresses tab and/or Bit Addresses on the Bit
Addresses tab) to be monitored.
6. Once all conditions have been set as required, click the OK pushbutton. Select the Cancel
pushbutton to abort the configuration operation.
Use the following procedure to select the Word addresses or Bit addresses. It is possible to set only word addresses,
bit addresses, or a mix of both.
Select a free area in the Address or Symbol columns with the right-mouse button and click
New. The Address Selection dialog is displayed.
2. Insert an address in the Address/Symbol field, or select the Browse pushbutton to locate a
symbol from the invoking application.
3. Click the OK pushbutton in the Address Selection dialog to accept the settings or select the
Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation. The address or symbol is displayed in the Data
Trace Configuration dialog. Multiple addresses or symbols can be applied.
4. To delete an existing address or symbol, select an address or symbol with the right-mouse
button and click Delete.
When in the Data Trace mode of operation, the data trace configuration in the PLC can be uploaded and
viewed/edited for re-use. Select the Upload pushbutton from the Data Trace Configuration dialog.
1, 2, 3…
1.
Managing the Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor
Use the following functions to manage the Data Trace or Time Chart Monitor.
Select the Execute button from the toolbar to execute a data trace/time chart monitor.
Select the Trigger button from the toolbar to set the trigger condition so that execution will end
normally.
Select the Stop button from the toolbar to stop a data trace/time chart monitor.
Select the Read button from the toolbar to upload the data trace. This may take a few moments;
the status of the Read function can be verified by the information supplied in the status bar. The
Read button is not used for the Time Chart Monitor mode of operation.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 49
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 5 – Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor Component
OMRON
Saving Data Trace Settings
Results data collected by the Data Trace and Time Chart Monitor functions can be saved as special
CX-Programmer data files (.cdt filename extension) or standard CSV files (.csv filename extension).
♦
Saving Data in a CX-Programmer Data File
To save the data in a special CX-Programmer data file (.cdt filename extension), select File – Save or File –
Save As.
♦
Saving Data in a CSV File
To save the data in a standard CSV file, select File – Save CSV.
Retrieving Data Trace/Time Monitor Settings
Data Traces can be stored on file and retrieved for later analysis. Settings may be retrieved from a project from an
invoking application. Select the Open option from the File menu. A standard open window is displayed.
Data Trace/Time Chart Monitoring component files can be retrieved via a standard File Open dialog. Use the
following procedure to open a Data Trace/Time Chart Monitoring component file.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Select the Open File button from the toolbar to open a Data Trace file.
A standard File Open dialog is displayed. Select a file from the Open dialog, followed by the
Open pushbutton. PLC Memory files have a .CDT extension.
Note:
It is possible to open a file type that is not applicable to the current mode, e.g. opening a
Data Trace file when in Time Chart Mode.
To close a currently open file, select the Close button from the file’s title bar. Recently opened
files can be directly selected for opening via the File menu.
Displaying a Data Trace/Time Chart
Once uploaded, the Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor component is populated with the required details.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 50
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 5 – Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor Component
OMRON
The top graph illustrates the word addresses or symbols. The bottom graph illustrates the bit addresses or symbols.
Each word address is colour coded. The word and bit addresses are listed in the left pane; the splitter bar can be
moved by placing the mouse cursor over the splitter bar and dragging it to its new position to show more or less of
the displayed numbers.
The slider position, used to analyze the data returned by the data trace, can be moved by placing
the mouse cursor over the graph slider and dragging it to its new position. Both sliders can be
moved together by selecting Synchronise Cursors from the View menu. When moving the slider,
it snaps to the sampled intervals. Moving and holding the slider left and right scrolls the view
window left and right.
The Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor component permits the zooming and scaling of the Data Trace/Time Chart
view. Use the following procedure to zoom and scale the Data Trace/Time Chart view.
Select the Zoom In button from the toolbar to zoom in on the word graph.
Select the Zoom Out button from the toolbar to zoom out from the word graph.
Select the Restore Zoom button from the toolbar to return the graph to the original view.
Select the Scale In button from the toolbar to zoom in on a particular graph against the vertical
axis.
Select the Scale Out button from the toolbar to zoom out from a particular graph against the
vertical axis.
Select the Restore Scale button from the toolbar to return the graph to the original scale.
This can be modified to switch between Histogram and Trend Graph when in Word Display Mode or to switch
between Outline and Block when in Bit Display Mode. Use the following procedure to switch display modes.
Select the Word Display Mode option or the Bit Display Mode option from the Options
menu.
2. For Word Display Mode, select either Histogram or Trend Graph.
3. For Bit Display Mode, select either Block or Outline.
The Word values shown on the screen can be displayed in one of four formats:
1, 2, 3…
1.
♦
Binary;
♦
Decimal;
♦
Signed Decimal;
♦ Hexadecimal.
Use the following procedure to select a Bit value format.
1. Select Word Value Format from the Options menu.
2. Select either Binary, Decimal, Signed Decimal or Hexadecimal.
The Bit values shown on the screen can be displayed in one of two formats:
1, 2, 3…
♦
Boolean (1 or 0);
♦ Text (On or Off).
Use the following procedure to select a Bit value format.
1. Select Bit Value Format from the Options menu.
2. Select either Boolean or Text.
The Data Trace/Time Chart view can be toggled to display either PLC addresses or symbol names. Select the
Options menu and then Show Symbol Names. If a symbol name is not available then the PLC address is shown.
1, 2, 3…
The colours associated with the Data Trace/Time Chart view can be customised. Use the following procedure to
change the colours on the Data Trace/Time Chart view.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Select Colours from the Options menu. The Trace Colour Selection dialog is displayed.
Select a Change pushbutton associated with a colour to be applied to a Word or Bit address.
A standard Microsoft Windows Colour dialog is displayed.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 51
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 5 – Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor Component
OMRON
3.
Select a colour from the Colour dialog and click the OK pushbutton. Select the Cancel
pushbutton from the Colour dialog to abort the operation.
4. If required, Select a Change pushbutton for another colour and repeat step 3.
5. Select the Apply pushbutton from the Trace Colour Selection dialog to apply the change
colour settings. Select the OK pushbutton to apply the change colour settings and close the
dialog. Select the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation.
The display of the Data Trace or Time Chart Monitor can be further refined by displaying a grid over the window.
Select Grid from the Options menu to control the display of the grid.
Any symbol names inherited from the invoking application can be displayed on Data Trace or Time Chart Monitor
by selecting Show Symbol Names from the Options menu.
SYSWIN Data Trace and Time Chart Monitor Files
SYSWIN 3.x Data Trace Files (*.SDT) and Time Chart monitoring files (*.STC) can be opened directly into
CX-Server. Use the following procedure to import these files:
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the Open button from the toolbar. The Open dialog is displayed.
Select an alternative file type from the Files of Type field, either SYSWIN version 3 Data
Trace Files (.SDT) or SYSWIN version 3 Time Chart Monitor Files (.SDC).
Select a file to open.
Select the Open pushbutton to import the file. Select the Cancel pushbutton to abort the
operation.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 52
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 6 – PLC Error Component
OMRON
CHAPTER 6
PLC Error Component
This chapter describes the PLC Error component and its ability to display and clear PLC errors, the PLC Error Log
and messages.
The PLC Error component is only available when the PLC is online.
The PLC Error component provides a view of current errors occurring in the PLC’s CPU and allows them to be
cleared when the cause of the PLC error has been removed (providing the PLC is in the correct mode). Errors
occurring are also written to the PLC Error Log and displayed in the PLC Error component automatically although,
if set to Manual Refresh, the error history is only updated when the Refresh button is selected.
Messages are displayed when a user-defined MSG instruction in the ladder program is encountered; these messages
may have been defined as part of an error trap or to provide more general information. Messages may also be
generated by the system in certain circumstances.
When a number of errors have occurred on the PLC, the most serious error is displayed automatically. For detailed
information concerning a PLC error, refer to the relevant PLC manual.
The status bar displays the connected device and PLC mode and the PLC Clock (if one is present and clock
monitoring has been enabled from the Options menu).
♦
The Error Log is always available for CV and CS1/CJ1-series PLCs but can be selectively enabled or disabled
for C-series PLCs.
The PLC Error component can be forced to stay as the top window by selecting the Settings option from the
Options menu and checking the Always on Top setting on the General tab.
Access to the PLC Error component is from the invoking application. If a serious error has occurred, the PLC Error
component is displayed automatically.
To close the PLC Errors dialog, select the Close button in the title bar.
Errors
The Errors tab of the PLC Error component displays the current error status of the PLC, when an error is detected
in the PLC it is shown with the item identifier, code position, error status level and error details. The icon next to the
item number indicates the type of error detected and reflects the error status in the Status column.
Errors may be cleared but this is dependent upon removal of the cause of the error in the PLC and the PLC’s
operating mode.
When the PLC is in Program Mode, all errors can be cleared; when in Monitor mode, only the last error can be
cleared. It is not always possible to clear an error when the PLC is in Run mode; in this instance, a dialog is
displayed which allows an attempt to be made at clearing the error. Providing the cause of the error has been
rectified, the error can be cleared, although the PLC mode may need to be switched to achieve this.
Use the following procedure to clear errors.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Select the Errors tab in the PLC Error component.
Select the Clear All pushbutton.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 53
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 6 – PLC Error Component
OMRON
There are three types of errors that can be recorded.
Fatal error: Program execution is halted and the PLC error indicator is constantly illuminated.
Warning error (non-fatal): The PLC error indicator flashes.
No errors: PLC is operating normally.
Note:
The user program, Parameter Area, and I/O Memory in the CPU Unit can be cleared to
initialize the CPU Unit by selecting Clear All Memory Areas from the Options menu of
the PLC Errors dialog box.
Error Log
The Error Log tab of the PLC Error component displays the error history of the associated PLC including entry
number, date and time of occurrence (if date and time stamping is supported by the PLC), code position and error
details. The icon shown against the Entry number indicates the error status (unlike the Errors tab, there is no Status
column).
Use the following procedure to clear the Error Log.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Select the Error Log tab in the PLC Error component.
Select the Clear All pushbutton.
Note:
The Error Log cannot be cleared in Run mode.
There are three types of Error Log entries recorded.
Fatal Error Log entry. Program execution is halted by this error occurrence.
Warning Error Log (non-fatal) entry.
No Error Log entries.
The maximum number of Error Log entries allowed by the PLC is displayed beneath the Error Log.
Note:
With the CX-One Ver 1.1 (CX-Programmer Ver. 6.1) and later versions, the error log
displayed in the PLC error window’s Error Log Tab can be saved as a CSV file by
clicking the Save Button. The saved data can be analyzed or printed later with programs
such as MS Excel.
Messages
The Messages tab of the PLC Error component displays the messages set by a ladder program. These are
user-defined messages which have been inserted into the PLC program, they do not have to be error messages.
Messages can either be selectively cleared or all cleared at the same time.
Use the following procedure to clear a message.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Select the Messages tab in the PLC Error component.
Highlight the message to be cleared and select the Clear pushbutton. Alternatively, select
the Clear All pushbutton or remove a selection by keeping the [SHIFT] key depressed when
highlighting messages.
Error Log Settings
The Error Log Options dialog allows the Error Log to be activated, time monitoring to be set and automatic update
of the Error Log to be performed. When the component is initially opened, it activates settings saved previously.
Time Monitoring
Some PLC types support a clock which can also be monitored. Use the following procedure to invoke time
monitoring against the PLC Clock.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 54
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 6 – PLC Error Component
OMRON
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
Select the Settings option from the Options menu.
Select the Clock tab.
Check the Monitor the PLC Clock setting. The current clock time from the PLC is then
displayed in the status bar so the user can verify the current time against the error log entries.
4. Select the Apply pushbutton to activate the settings. Select the OK pushbutton to apply the
settings and close the dialog. Select the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation.
Note:
Where PLCs do not support a clock, ‘No Clock’ is displayed in the Status Bar and the
information on the Clock tab is greyed-out.
Manually Updating the Error Log
Manual refresh of the Error Log is useful if it is desired to prevent other users from clearing the displayed error
history. Use the following procedure to enable manual refresh of the error log.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
Select the Settings option from the Options menu.
Select the Error Log tab.
Check the Update Error Log Entries Automatically setting. If not checked, a Refresh
pushbutton is displayed next to the Clear pushbutton to manually refresh the Error Log
content (in the PLC Error component).
4. Select the Apply pushbutton to activate the settings. Select the OK pushbutton to apply the
settings and close the dialog. Select the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation.
Use the following procedure to refresh the Error Log automatically.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the Settings option from the Options menu.
Select the Error Log tab.
Deselect the Update Error Log Entries Automatically setting.
Select the Apply pushbutton to activate the settings. Select the OK pushbutton to apply the
settings and close the dialog. Select the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation.
Customising the Layout of the Error Log
Some PLCs do not support time stamps, date stamps or clocks. The layout of the Error Log can be changed to
remove the time and date columns as necessary and make the display more relevant to the PLC. Use the following
procedure to customise the layout of the PLC Error component.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
Select the Settings option from the Options menu.
Select the Error Log tab.
Error Log time and date information can be hidden from view by checking the Hide Error
Log Time Column and the Hide Error Log Date Column settings.
4. Select the Apply pushbutton to activate the settings. Select the OK pushbutton to apply the
settings and close the dialog. Select the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation.
Enabling and Disabling the Error Log
For C-series PLCs only, the error log can be enabled and disabled as required. Use the following procedure to
enable or disable the error log.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the Settings option from the Options menu.
Select the Error Log tab.
Check the Error Log Enabled setting to manually monitor errors.
Deselect the Error Log Enabled setting to stop monitoring errors.
Select the Apply pushbutton to activate the settings. Select the OK pushbutton to apply the
settings and close the dialog. Select the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation.
Overwriting Error Log Entries
For C-series PLCs only, the overwrite mode depends upon the CPU type. It may either overwrite the last entry in
the Error Log each time or cycle through the Error Log and start to overwrite it from the beginning. Overwriting is
only performed when the maximum number of records in the Error Log has been reached. Again this is PLC
dependent.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 55
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 6 – PLC Error Component
1, 2, 3…
OMRON
1.
2.
3.
Select the Settings option from the Options menu
Select the Error Log tab.
Check the Error Log Overwrite Mode setting to allow the PLC to overwrite Error Log
entries.
4. Select the Apply pushbutton to activate the settings. Select the OK pushbutton to apply the
settings and close the dialog. Select the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation.
Displaying the Error Log
The PLC Error component can be set so that it is only activated when an error in the PLC actually occurs (providing
it is already open); for example, if the PLC Error component has been minimised it automatically returns to full size
as the top window when an error is generated in the PLC.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
Select the Settings option from the Options menu.
Select the General tab.
Check the Activate only when Error detected setting.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 56
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 7 – Memory Card Component
OMRON
CHAPTER 7
Memory Card Component
This chapter describes the Memory Card component available to CV-series PLCs and CS/CJ-series PLCs and its
ability to store and transfer data. File storage is achieved by a File memory card for a CV-series PLC and a Compact
Flash or EM memory configured as ‘file memory’ for a CS1-series PLC.
Information can be transferred from the PLC to the memory card or from the memory card to the PLC. A saved
program can be transferred from the memory card to the program area during operation. Extended PLC setup and
program files can be automatically transferred at PLC startup if they are named autoexec.std and autoexec.obj
respectively.
It is possible to run the Memory Card component whilst the PLC is offline.
The Memory Card component can be forced to be displayed in focus by selecting the Always on top option from the
Options menu.
For moving, resizing, maximising, minimising and closing windows, refer to Microsoft Windows online help for
further information.
Access to the Memory Card component is from the invoking application.
Memory Card Operation
The appearance and behavior of the Memory Card component is similar to Microsoft Windows Explorer.
Differences between the Microsoft Windows Explorer exist within the Memory Card component when certain
functions are accessed. Refer to Microsoft Windows Explorer help, part of the standard Microsoft Windows
documentation for options and functions not described in this chapter but available within the Memory Card
component.
Caution:
Memory cards must be formatted prior to use.
The status bar provides instant help, the PLC and CPU type, and quick reference information describing how much
space is available on a particular device for the selection in the left pane.
In addition to the devices and folders supported by the PC, the Memory Card component also displays the
connected PLC device. In terms of the device/folder structure of Microsoft Windows Explorer, the PLC contains a
Memory Card folder if available (i.e. if fitted), Program Area, IO Memory Area and Parameter Area. For a
CS/CJ-series PLC, a Memory Card folder can contain subfolders.
Note:
In order to view or execute on the PLC a file from the memory card, the file must be
copied back to the PC folder. Double clicking on the files in the list has no action
associated with it since files cannot be opened across the communications connected to
the PLC.
A memory card can be displayed for each connected PLC and allows their contents to be moved between
destinations. The operation is aborted if there is not enough space. Snapshots of PLC Memory areas can be taken
by transferring information from the Program Area, IO Memory Area or Parameter area to the Memory Card
folder.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 57
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 7 – Memory Card Component
OMRON
For CV-series PLCs memory cards can be either RAM, EPROM, or EEPROM. EPROM and EEPROM cards can
only be written to using the Memory Card Writer.
For CS1-series PLCs memory cards can be either Compact Flash disk or configured EM memory.
There are three ways in which memory cards can be accessed:
♦
They can be read from/written to during an online operation using programming software;
♦
By instruction via a program in the PLC;
♦ Using the Memory Card component;
Refer to the associated PLC manual for further information.
The Memory Card component automatically detects whether the memory card is in place or not. An error message
is displayed if it is detected that the memory card has been removed whilst the Memory Card component is active.
Files held on the memory card can be compared with data in the PLC. File formats can be one of four types:
♦
.LDP indicates partial program area files;
♦
.OBJ indicates full program area files;
♦
.STD indicates PLC setup area files;
♦ .IOM indicates any other type of file.
The CS/CJ-series PLC also supports the configuration of EM memory as file memory. Providing the EM Table
Setting Enabled option from the Settings menu is set within the PLC Setup component whilst in Program mode.
Refer to Chapter 4 - PLC Setup Component for further details.
A fitted memory card on CV-series PLCs or Compact Flash card on CS/CJ-series PLCs must be formatted to be
used as a file storage device. Setting a CS1-series PLC as file memory in the PLC Setup component automatically
formats EM file memory for use in the Memory Card component.
Memory Card Display
The Memory Card component can be manipulated in the same manner as most Microsoft Windows displays to
control what is displayed; for example, expansion of the file storage hierarchy.
The left pane displays the content, in terms of Devices, Networks and Points.
To expand the hierarchy in the left pane, select this icon.
To collapse the hierarchy in the left pane, select this icon.
To view the content of a particular branch in the hierarchy, double-click on the item in the left
pane.
Select the Large Icons button from the toolbar to display the content of the right pane as large
icons.
Select the Small Icons button from the toolbar to display the content of the right pane as small
icons.
Select the List button from the toolbar to display the content of the right pane as a list.
Select the Details button from the toolbar to display the content of the right pane with associated
details.
Use the following procedure to copy or move information from or in the PLC Memory component.
1, 2, 3…
1.
Select an item, or items, in a window. More than one item can be selected by pressing Shift
and selecting another item to extend the selection, or by pressing Ctrl and selecting another
item to add to the selection.
2. Select the Copy button from the toolbar to copy the item, or the Cut button from the toolbar
to move the item.
3. Select an area to move the items to, for instance copying data area values into another data
area.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 58
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 7 – Memory Card Component
OMRON
4.
Select the Paste button from the toolbar to paste the item. A Paste operation can be
performed several times without copying again.
A file or label (if at top level) can be renamed. Use the following procedure to rename memory card data.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Highlight the required document or folder.
Select the Rename button from the toolbar. The document/folder name can now accept
input. Enter the new name and press Return.
A file or folder can be deleted. Use the following procedure to delete a file or folder.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Highlight the required document or folder.
Select the Delete button from the toolbar. A Confirm Folder Delete dialog is displayed.
Select the Yes pushbutton to continue with the deletion or the No pushbutton to abort the
operation.
The Toolbar and status bar can both be turned on or off. Select Status Bar from the View menu to control the
display of the status bar. Select Toolbar from the View menu to control the display of the PLC Memory toolbar.
3.
If the display of a PLC device takes a few moments to refresh, ensure the Auto Refresh PLC View option from the
Options menu is turned off. This then allows the PLC to be refreshed manually by selecting Refresh from the View
menu.
Extended PLC setup and program files can be transferred to the Memory Card as autoexec files so they can be
automatically transferred at PLC startup. Select the Transfer as AutoExec Files from the Options menu.
Memory Card Properties
Use the following procedure to view memory card properties.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
Highlight the required document or folder. Multiple devices, folders and files can be
selected if required.
Select the Properties button from the toolbar.
View the details. Some options may be amended, for instance the read-only attribute for a
file; in this instance, amend settings as appropriate. Select the OK pushbutton to complete
the operation or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation.
Transferring Data between the PLC and Memory Card
Use the following procedure to transfer data between the PLC and memory card.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Select the Files on the PLC to be copied and click the right-mouse button.
Select Transfer To option followed by either Memory Card or EM File Area.
Possible Memory Card Errors
The following list provides a brief overview of the possible errors that could arise with the memory card when
operating in Program Mode. Refer to the associated PLC manual for further information.
♦
The PLC Program is protected and cannot be written to;
♦
The file card does not contain enough free space to transfer the PLC data required;
♦
The source file name specified to transfer data from does not exist;
♦
The file on device already exists;
♦
The file device is read only and cannot be written to;
♦
The file device does not exist, insert the memory card;
♦
Cannot transfer data from the file device to the PLC’s area when the PLC is in Run mode;
♦
To transfer data from the file device to the PLC’s IO area, the PLC must be in Program mode;
♦
The data cannot be transferred to the PLC as the PLC is password protected or access rights have not been
granted.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 59
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 7 – Memory Card Component
Note:
1, 2, 3…
1.
OMRON
With the CX-One Ver 1.1 (CX-Programmer Ver. 6.1) and later versions, the following
functions can be executed if the PLC model is set to CP1H.
Memory Cassette Transfer function
Data can be transferred and verified between the Memory Cassette and CP1H CPU Unit.
♦ Applicable Data
The following table lists the kinds of data that can be selected for transfer/verification.
Applicable data
Program, parameters, Data Memory, variable tables, comments, program index, and Data Memory
initial values
♦ Procedure
Select PLC – Edit – Memory Cassette/DM and click the Transfer to Memory Cassette,
Transfer to PLC, or Verify All Areas Button.
2.
Data Memory to Flash Memory Backup function
All of the Data Memory in the CP1H CPU Unit’s internal RAM can be backed up as DM
initial values in the CPU Unit’s internal flash memory. The backed up data is known as
Backup DM (DM initial values).
♦ Procedure
Select PLC – Edit – Memory Cassette/DM and click the Backup Button in the Backup to
Flash Memory Field.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 60
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 8 – CX-Net Network Configuration Tool
OMRON
CHAPTER 8
CX-Server Network Configuration Tool (CX-Net)
This chapter describes the CX-Server (CX-Net) Network Configuration tool, the procedures for establishing
communications to PLCs for direct and gateway connections. The Network Configuration Tool hosts tools that
assist in the creation and editing of local and network Routing Tables and the creation and editing of Data Link
Tables.
To successfully establish communications between CX-Server and a network PLC, an intermediary or gateway
PLC has to contain a valid Routing table to allow the correct routing of packets. The CX-Net Network
Configuration tool allows communications to PLCs with a CX-Server project and configuration of the PLC. The
CX-Net Network Configuration tool allows the following:
♦
Hosts the Routing Table editor to provide routing table support at a network level, enabling PLCs to act as
gateways across networks;
♦
Hosts the Data Link table editor to provide Data Link table support at a network level;
♦
Setup of PLC devices and their communication units;
♦
Network diagnostics;
♦
Control of Data Link operation.
Note:
The availability, format and content of the facilities within the CX-Net Network
Configuration tool depend upon the device type of the PLC being considered (C-series,
CS1-series or CV-series) and the network to which that PLC is connected (SYSMAC
LINK, SYSMAC NET, Ethernet or Controller Link).
Refer to the specific OMRON System and Operation manuals for details of the operation of the various network
units and their available settings and options.
The status bar provides instant help, the status of the current connection and the operating mode of the PLC.
When the CX-Net is initially loaded, the Project Devices field is empty. Opening or creating a CX-Server project
populates the Project Devices list with all the devices in that CX-Server project. Selecting each device in turn
causes the right-hand side of the dialog to display a graphical representation of that connection (either direct or
through a gateway connection), together with node and network information.
Note:
Offline connections are shown as a red line whilst for online connections this changes to
green. Other aspects also change when online, refer to Chapter 8 - Opening a PLC for
further information.
Any operations (e.g. network unit setup, Data Link and routing table editing) which are carried out affect the
physical connection PLC which is currently connected, not the CX-Server project PLC.
Routing Tables contain the information necessary to allow communications between different networks including
local and remote network address details; they are held in a specific area of PLC memory. Refer to Chapter 11 - for
information regarding Routing Tables.
CS/CJ/CP-series PLCs linked to either a Controller Link or Ethernet network also use FINS routing tables.
CX-Server PLC Tools_Page 61
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 8 – CX-Net Network Configuration Tool
OMRON
CV-series PLCs also have routing tables which, unlike the C-series, are not dependent upon the networks
(SYSMAC LINK, SYSMAC NET or Ethernet or Controller Link) to which they are connected. These tables are
known as FINS routing tables. A direct connection is known as a Local Routing Table. A network connection is
known as a Network Routing Table.
C-series PLCs linked to a SYSMAC LINK network are unable to communicate with a different network and
therefore do not have a routing table; however, C-series PLCs linked to a SYSMAC NET or Controller Link
network do have this capability and so have an associated routing table. These tables are known as SYSMAC NET
and FINS routing tables respectively.
Data Link Tables provide a means of allowing a network of devices to share information. The manner in which this
information is distributed in a system depends upon the network to which the table relates. The SYSMAC NET
network contains one node acting as the ‘parent’ node or Data Link server (containing the Data Link table), unlike
the SYSMAC LINK network where a copy of the Data Link table is sent to all nodes on that network. The
Controller Link network operates in a similar manner to SYSMAC LINK except that the network is split into two
areas with each node being associated with one or other of these areas. Data is then copied to each node in the
related area. Refer to Chapter 10 - Data Links for further information regarding Data Link Tables.
For moving, resizing, maximising, minimising and closing windows, refer to Microsoft Windows online help for
further information.
Access to the CX-Net Network Configuration tool is either from the invoking application or from the Start
pushbutton on the Microsoft Windows taskbar.
To close the CX-Net Network Configuration tool, select the Close button in the title bar.
CX-Net and CX-Server Projects
All device information is contained within a CX-Server project file. Once the file has been opened, the PLCs listed
in that CX-Server project can be opened and the devices on their networks manipulated. CX-Server projects can be
manipulated from the CX-Net Network Configuration tool.
Creating a New CX-Server Project
A new CX-Server project can be created from the CX-Net Network Configuration tool. Use the following
procedure to create a new CX-Server project.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
Select New from the Project Menu. The Create Project dialog is displayed.
The CX-Server project must be saved before it can be edited. Enter a file name in the File
name field. An existing CX-Server project can be overwritten by selecting a .CDM file
displayed in the Create project dialog.
Select the Save pushbutton to save the new project or the Cancel pushbutton to abort the
operation. CX-Server files have a .CDM extension.
Opening an Existing CX-Server Project
CX-Server project files can be retrieved using a standard File Open dialog. To close a currently open file, create a
new CX-Server project or select Close from the Project menu.
Use the following procedure to open a CX-Server project file.
Select the Open button from the toolbar to open a CX-Server project file.
A standard File Open dialog is displayed. Select a file from the Open dialog, followed by the
Open pushbutton. PLC Memory files have a .CDM extension.
A list of the most recently opened CX-Server project files is displayed in the Project menu.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Note:
Select Save As from the Project menu to save a project open in CX-Net under any
desired name.
Adding a Device
To add a device to a CX-Server project, select the Add Device option from the Project menu. The Add PLC dialog
is displayed. The Add PLC dialog is identical to the Change PLC dialog.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 62
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 8 – CX-Net Network Configuration Tool
OMRON
To change a device within a CX-Server project, select the Change Device option from the Project menu. The
Change PLC dialog is displayed.
Editing a Device List
The Device List dialog, (see Runtime User manual) can be used to change the settings of the PLCs in the currently
opened CX-Server project, and to add new PLCs.
The CX-Server project Device List can only be edited when a device is not currently open – the option is disabled
when a connection is active.
Select the Edit Project button from the toolbar to edit a CX-Server project, or select the Edit
option from the Project menu.
PLC Settings
The PLC menu contains options that operate on a single PLC device within the open CX-Server project, including
the setup of its units. It also contains the options for opening and closing a PLC device.
Opening a PLC
A PLC can be opened for communications once the associated CX-Server project file has been opened. Use the
following procedure to open a PLC.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Select a device from the PLC Devices list. If required, add a device to the CX-Server project
by selecting Add Device from the Project menu and edit the CX-Server project by selecting
the Edit Project button from the toolbar.
Select the Open / Project Device button from the toolbar.
Note:
The Open option does not become available until a device name has been selected from
the Project Devices list.
It may take several seconds to establish a connection. If a connection cannot be made with the PLC's settings, then
a message appears showing this. In this case it may be necessary to change the PLC's settings before trying again, or
checking that the physical connection (e.g. wiring) is possible.
For SYSMAC LINK end connections a new SYSMAC LINK menu is added allowing specific SYSMAC LINK
network operation.
For Controller Link end connections a new Controller Link menu is added allowing specific Controller Link
network operation.
When a physical connection has been made the status of the PLC in the status bar changes to Online with the
current mode of the PLC. The connection lines change colour to green to also denote the PLC is online. In addition,
the actual values for Node and Network are displayed, together with details of the device actually connected (rather
than what is defined in the CX-Server project for that setting). When a connection is made to an Ethernet network
the Node box changes to a drop-down list, allowing the node to be changed in order to connect to a new PLC. If a
node is selected but there is nothing there, then no information is shown. Returning to offline operation causes a
return to the original (CX-Server project) configuration settings in the Node and Network fields.
Upon connection, certain menu options are made available, depending upon the connection type.
The current operating mode (Run) of the connected PLC is shown in the status bar of the tool – when making a
connection, or when a connection is broken, the mode indicator shows Unknown. The indicator shows Run, Stop or
Monitor when a connection is properly completed. CV-series PLCs also support a Debug mode. This mode
indicator changes whenever a change is made in the operating mode of the PLC.
Note:
The mode in which the PLC runs on startup is set in the PLC Setup Component, refer to
Chapter 4 - PLC Setup Component.
Closing a PLC
The Open / Project Device button on the toolbar acts as a toggle switch. To close a device,
simply reselect the Open / Project Device button on the toolbar (i.e. when the menu option
shows a tick against it and the toolbar button is depressed).
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 63
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 8 – CX-Net Network Configuration Tool
OMRON
When the device is closed, the details displayed in the Connection part of the CX-Net Network Configuration tool
are removed.
Configuring a PLC’s System Settings
The PLC Setup Component can be selected to define the settings which govern the PLC’s
behavior; for example, connection mode. Select the Configure PLC System Settings button
from the toolbar. Refer to Chapter 4 - PLC Setup Component for further information.
Alternatively, select PLC Setup from the PLC menu.
Scanning for PLC Connections
A serial scan can be performed which searches all PC COM ports to see if there are any currently attached PLCs
and, if found, what communication settings are being employed by those PLCs. This procedure is useful when the
configuration of the PLCs communication settings (i.e. baud rate) are unknown. Device information from the
results of the scan can then be copied into the CX-Server project, if required. Refer to Chapter 8 - Dragging Device
Information into a CX-Server Project.
When the Scan Serial Ports for PLCs dialog is first displayed, it shows the results of the last scan to be performed
until the Refresh pushbutton has been clicked. Use the following procedure to scan for PLC connections.
1, 2, 3…
1.
Open a CX-Server project by selecting the Open button from the toolbar or create a new
project. If required, add a device to the CX-Server project by selecting Add Device from the
Project menu and edit the CX-Server project by selecting the Edit Project button from the
toolbar.
2.
Select Scan Serial Ports for PLCs from the Project menu. The Scan Serial Ports for PLCs
dialog is displayed.
3.
Select either individual ports or select the Select All pushbutton to scan all ports from the
Available Ports field.
4.
Select either individual baud rates or select the Select All pushbutton to scan all baud rates
from the Baud Rates field.
5.
Select either individual cable types or select the Select All pushbutton to scan all cable types
from the Cable types field.
6.
Select the Next pushbutton; the Scan Serial Ports For PLCs dialog starts the scan. The
Status field indicates the current progress. On completion, all currently connected PLCs are
listed in the Drag and Drop Device Units field.
Note:
If changes are made to PLC connections after a scan has been made, select the Refresh
pushbutton to update the displayed list.
Dragging Device Information into a CX-Server Project
The scan operation described in Chapter 8 - Scanning for PLC Connections, picks up device information from the
physically connected serial port devices. Once a scan has been performed, the Scan Serial Ports for PLCs dialog
can remain open alongside the CX-Net Network Configuration tool. Dragging a device or network unit from the
Drag & Drop Device Units field into the Project Device field in the CX-Net Network Configuration tool allows
this device information to be added into the CX-Server project.
Use the following procedure to utilise a convenient shortcut for entering PLC details into a CX-Server project.
1, 2, 3…
1.
Open a CX-Server project by selecting the Open button from the toolbar or create a new
project. If required, add a device to the CX-Server project by selecting Add Device from the
Project menu and edit the CX-Server project by selecting the Edit Project button from the
toolbar.
2. Perform a scan by selecting Scan Serial Ports for PLCs from the Project menu.
3. Select the required device in the Drag and Drop Device Units field.
4. Drag the device across to the Project Devices field in the CX-Net Network Configuration
tool.
Displaying PLC Device Information
The PLC Device Information dialog displays the selected CX-Server project PLC’s device and
connection details. To display PLC device information, select the Display PLC Information
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 64
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 8 – CX-Net Network Configuration Tool
OMRON
button from the toolbar, or select the Information command from the PLC menu.
Setting the PLC Mode
The main window of the CX-Net Network Configuration tool shows the current operating mode of the connected
PLC. The PLC Set Mode dialog allows this to be changed. The run modes available to a PLC depend upon the PLC
device type. Use the following procedure to set the PLC Mode.
1, 2, 3…
1.
Open a CX-Server project by selecting the Open button from the toolbar or create a new
project. If required, add a device to the CX-Server project by selecting Add Device from the
Project menu and edit the CX-Server project by selecting the Edit Project button from the
toolbar.
2. Select the Open / Project Device button from the toolbar to open connections to the device.
3.
4.
5.
Select the Set PLC Operating Mode button from the toolbar or select the Set Mode
command from the PLC menu.
Click on the required Operating Mode setting. Select the Set pushbutton. A confirmation
dialog appears – confirm the operation.
Select the Close pushbutton to remove the dialog.
Clearing PLC Errors
Errors, error logs and messages generated by a PLC can be examined and cleared (if possible)
via the PLC Error Component. Select the Display PLC Error Status button on the toolbar or,
select the PLC Error Status command from the PLC menu. Refer to Chapter 6 - PLC Error
Component for more information.
Creating an IO Table
The PLCs IO Table can also be manipulated by the CX-Net Network Configuration tool by
activating the IO Table component. The IO Table allows Unit Setup and Software Switch setup
of SIOU units as well as IO configuration and creation. Before editing the PLCs IO Table it must
be transferred from the PLC into the IO Table component. Select the Configure IO Table
button from the toolbar or select the I/O table Setup commend from the PLC menu. Refer to
Chapter 3 - IO Table Component for further details. Use the following procedure to activate the
IO Table component.
Displaying the PLC Unit Status
The Unit Status option is only available for those nodes where the end connection to the PLC is either SYSMAC
LINK, SYSMAC NET, Ethernet or Controller Link; in each instance the type of information displayed differs but
the pushbuttons available are identical.
♦
SYSMAC LINK. Displays Communications Test, Line Status, Data Link Status, Controller Errors, Backup
Status Errors, Error Status, Error Log, Status, Error Details;
♦
SYSMAC NET. Displays Data Link Status, Operating Status, Errors;
♦
Ethernet. Displays General Status, Error Flags and Error Logs;
♦ Controller Link. Displays Data Link Status, nodes, Errors and Error Logs.
The information displayed is for viewing only. However, the Error Log can be cleared. Use the following
procedure to display the PLC Unit Status.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
Open a CX-Server project by selecting the Open button from the toolbar or create a new
project. If required, add a device to the CX-Server project by selecting Add Device from the
Project menu and edit the CX-Server project by selecting the Edit Project button from the
toolbar.
Select the Open/Close Project Device PLC button from the toolbar to open connections to
the device.
Select the Show Unit Status button from the toolbar or select Unit Status from the PLC
menu.
Select the Clear Log pushbutton to delete the entries in the error log.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 65
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 8 – CX-Net Network Configuration Tool
5.
OMRON
Select the Close pushbutton to remove the dialog.
Note:
Unit status and error log data for Communications Units (e.g., Controller Link Units and
SYSMAC LINK Units) can be written to files in CSV format. Click the Save button in
the PLC Unit Status dialog box and the Save As dialog box will appear. Select the CSV
format and the folder in which to save, input the file name, and click the Save button.
The status of the Communications Unit and the error log data will be saved in a CSV file.
This function allows network errors to be analysed from CSV files.
Note:
With a C-series PLCs, the error log for a Communications Unit (e.g., Controller Link
Unit or SYSMAC LINK Unit) can be saved using PLC | Unit Status/Error Log.
Testing the Network Connection
Once network connections have been created, the network should be tested to ensure that all nodes are responding
properly. The following tests are available:
♦
Internode Echo-Back Test. This test checks the condition of a number of specific network and node address
and whether communications can be established;
♦
Broadcast Nodes Test. This test examines all nodes on the network and is available for Ethernet, Controller
Link and SYSMAC LINK only. This test may take some time for an Ethernet network which is not subject to
the same size restrictions as Controller Link and SYSMAC LINK. The results show all nodes found and the
PLC type if possible;
♦
Ping Node Test. Allows echo testing of a specific TCP IP address.
Select the required test from the associated button in the toolbar, either the Echo Back Test
button, the Broadcast Test button or the Ping Test button.
Communications Unit Setup
The Configure Communications Unit button from the toolbar is used for SYSMAC LINK,
SYSMAC NET and Controller Link setup options on SIOU units for C-series PLCs. These
options only describe settings that cannot be accessed via the IO Table component.
For CS1-series PLCs and CV-series PLCs, the setup allows SYSMAC NET, SYSMAC LINK and Controller Link
setup. This information is defined via the IO Table component; refer to Chapter 3 - IO Table Component for further
information.
Select a unit type from the Unit Type field. If provided, select the Setup pushbutton to further configure
communications setup. Select the Close pushbutton to close the dialog.
SYSMAC LINK Settings
The SYSMAC LINK menu only appears when the end connection is the SYSMAC LINK network. It allows settings
specific to a SYSMAC LINK network to be made.
Network Status
The SYSMAC LINK Network Status dialog shows the nodes present on the network. It also indicates the
controlling server node. Use the following procedure to setup SYSMAC LINK Network Status settings.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Select the Network Status option from the SYSMAC LINK menu.
Select the Close pushbutton to remove the dialog.
Network Settings
The Network Settings dialog allows parameter settings for a SYSMAC LINK network to be defined; this includes
the maximum number of nodes on a network, the maximum number of polling units per communications cycle, and
the maximum number of frames per communications cycle.
On entry, this dialog displays the last parameters entered for a selected network. Use the following procedure to
setup SYSMAC LINK Network Settings.
1, 2, 3…
1.
Select the Network Setup option from the SYSMAC LINK menu.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 66
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 8 – CX-Net Network Configuration Tool
OMRON
2.
3.
4.
Adjust the settings as required (or select the New pushbutton to return to the default values
for the network).
Select the Write pushbutton to download the network parameters to the SYSMAC LINK
network controller. Note that this is only possible when the connected node is the polling
(server) node – otherwise the Write pushbutton is disabled. The status display indicates
whether the write operation was successful.
Select the Close pushbutton to remove the dialog.
Controller Link Settings
The Controller Link menu only appears when the end connection is the Controller Link network. It allows settings
specific to a Controller Link network to be made.
Network Status
The Controller Link Network Status dialog shows the nodes present on the network. It also indicates the controlling
server node. Use the following procedure to setup Controller Link Network Status settings.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Select the Network Status option from the Controller Link menu.
Select the Close pushbutton to remove the dialog.
Network Settings
The Network Setup dialog allows parameter settings for a Controller Link network to be defined; this includes the
maximum number of nodes on a network, the maximum number of polling units per communications cycle, and the
maximum number of frames per communications cycle.
On entry, this dialog displays the last parameters entered for a selected network. Use the following procedure to
setup Controller Link Network Setup settings.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the Network Setup option from the Controller Link menu.
Adjust the settings as required (or select the New pushbutton to return to the default values
for the network).
Select the Write pushbutton to download the network parameters to the SYSMAC LINK
network controller. Note that this is only possible when the connected node is the polling
(server) node – otherwise the Write pushbutton is disabled. The status display indicates
whether the write operation was successful.
Select the Close pushbutton to remove the dialog.
Routing Tables
Routing tables allow networked PLCs to be configured so that they can communicate with each other via gateways;
across remote networks. These tables contain the network and unit number information required. It is only
necessary to set up routing tables if the end connection PLC is not a direct connection, i.e. using another PLC as a
gateway connection. The routing table is held within the PLC(s) which acts as the gateway device. Different types
of PLC and networks have different capabilities for routing.
For details about using routing tables refer to Chapter 11 – Routing Tables.
Data Link
Data Link tables allow a PLC to be configured so that it can participate in one or more automatic data sharing
schemes, over SYSMAC LINK, SYSMAC NET and Controller Link networks, without the need for special
programming. Words of IO and DM can be set aside for use as data link words, which are allocated to various
nodes in the network. Limits on the amount of data and number of nodes varies with the type of network and the
type of PLC. The allocation of words to nodes is defined by two or more Data Link tables.
Data can only be shared on a single physical network. A gateway cannot be used to pass information from one
network to another.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 67
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 8 – CX-Net Network Configuration Tool
OMRON
SYSMAC NET data links can be configured so that both C-Series and CV-Series PLCs can share data. However,
it is a limitation that in these mixed configurations, the master must be a C-Series PLC. There are no such
restrictions on a SYSMAC LINK or Controller Link network.
The Data Link menu includes options to setup the SYSMAC NET, SYSMAC LINK and Controller Link Data
Links.
The DataLinks Editor is used to configure SYSMAC LINK and Controller Link data links, Refer to Chapter 10 –
Data Links.
A separate datalink editor is utilised for configuration of SYSMAC NET datalinks, Refer to Chapter 8 - Offline
SYSMAC NET Data Link Editor for further details.
Data Link Setup
The Data Link Setup dialog varies in title and content according to the type of network connected to the current
PLC; however, the pushbutton functions on each dialog are the same.
The dialog lists the contents of the Data Link table associated with the PLC; initially the Data Link table displayed
is empty, or set to zero, until a table has been opened or read.
SYSMAC NET Data Link Setup
The setup dialog first needs to know whether the Data Link table is written for CV-Series or C-Series PLC type
SYSMAC NET this information is requested using the SYSMAC NET Table Type dialog.
Use the following procedure to setup the SYSMAC NET Data Link.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Select the Online Edit Data Link button from the toolbar.
Select a setting to indicate the type of SYSMAC NET which is used in the Data Link.
3.
Select the OK pushbutton to continue (the Data Link Setup dialog is displayed), or the
Cancel pushbutton to abort the operation.
Opening a Table
Use the following procedure to open a table.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the Open pushbutton to open a Data Link table from disk (alternatively select the
Read pushbutton to view the table in the PLC).
Select the appropriate table and select the OK pushbutton.
The Data Link Setup dialog is now populated with the contents of the Data Link file.
Select the Write pushbutton to transfer the table to the PLC.
Select the Verify pushbutton to compare the contents in the dialog with those in the PLC.
Note:
Data Link tables have a ‘.SL3’ (SYSMAC LINK), ‘.SN3’ (SYSMAC NET) or ‘.CL3’
(Controller Link) filename extension.
Editing a Table
To edit the displayed Data Link table, click on the Edit pushbutton; the associated offline table editor is used, refer
to Chapter 10 – for SYSMAC LINK / Controller Link Data Link Editor and Chapter 8 - Offline SYSMAC NET Data
Link Editor for further details.
Updating Table Status
After an editing session using the offline editor (i.e. after pressing the Edit pushbutton), the dialog can be updated
using the Update pushbutton.
Saving a Table
The Save As dialog allows the displayed table to be saved to disk with a given name. Use the following procedure
to save a table.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 68
Click on the Save As pushbutton in the Data Link Setup dialog. The Save As dialog is
displayed.
Enter the new file name for the data link table (ensure that the file type is correct) in the File
name field.
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 8 – CX-Net Network Configuration Tool
OMRON
3.
Either select the Save pushbutton to save the new file and return to the previous dialog or
select the Cancel to abort the operation.
Deleting a Table in a PLC
The current Data Link table held in the PLC can be deleted by selecting the Delete pushbutton.
Viewing Table Information
The Table Information dialog displays basic information relating to the selected Data Link table indicating the
author, associated network and file name. The information displayed on this screen cannot be edited whilst online.
Use the following procedure to view table information.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Select the Info pushbutton on the Data Link Setup dialog.
Select the Close pushbutton to remove the dialog from the screen. The Data Link Table
dialog is redisplayed.
Select the New pushbutton in the dialog to clear the dialog information.
Offline SYSMAC NET Data Link Editor
The SYSMAC NET Data Link Table Editor is available to both CV-series and C-series PLCs linked to a SYSMAC
NET unit.
The status bar provides instant help.
Access to the SYSMAC NET Data Link Editor dialog is achieved in a number of ways:
♦
From the CX-Net Network Configuration tool. Select Editor from the Data Link menu. The
Select New File type dialog is displayed. Select the SYSMAC NET file type from the File
Type field and select the OK pushbutton.
♦
From the Data Link Setup dialog. Select the Edit pushbutton.
♦
From the Start pushbutton in the Microsoft Windows taskbar. The Select New File type
dialog is displayed. Select the SYSMAC NET file type from the File Type field and select
the OK pushbutton.
Creating and Editing a SYSMAC NET Data Link Table Item
Use the following procedure to creates SYSMAC NET Data Link Table Item.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Select the New button from the toolbar in the SYSMAC NET Data Link Table Editor
dialog.
Select the Insert Table Item option from the Table menu. Address information can also be
edited by double-clicking on the required node.
The Add SYSMAC NET Data Link Table Item dialog allows the memory area at the node to be configured. Use the
following procedure to configure the node.
1, 2, 3…
1.
Enter the node number in the Node No field; this must be in the range 1 to 126. /verify
where
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 69
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 8 – CX-Net Network Configuration Tool
2.
3.
Note:
OMRON
Enter the memory size; this must be in the range 0 to 127.
Select the OK pushbutton to redisplay the Data Link Table Editor.
The above example applies to CV-Series, but C-Series operates in exactly the same
manner although the information displayed differs slightly.
To edit a Data Link table, double-click on a table item or select the Edit Table Item button from
the toolbar; the Edit Data Link Table dialog is displayed (this is identical to the Add Data Link
Table Item dialog shown above).
Deleting an Item from the SYSMAC NET Data Link Table
Use the following procedure to delete an item from the SYSMAC NET Data Link Table.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Select the node to delete an item and select the Delete Item button from the toolbar.
A confirmation dialog is displayed. Select the Yes pushbutton to confirm the deletion of the
item. Select the No pushbutton to abort the operation.
Opening an Existing SYSMAC NET Data Link Table
Use the following procedure to open an existing SYSMAC NET Data Link Table.
1, 2, 3…
1.
To open a table from disk, select the Open button from the toolbar in the Data Link Editor
dialog. A standard File Open dialog is displayed.
2.
Select a file from the Open dialog and select the Open pushbutton. The SYSMAC NET
Data Link Table Editor is automatically populated with the contents of the selected file.
Note:
SYSMAC NET Data Link table files are identified by the ‘.SM3’ extension.
Logical Error Checking
The SYSMAC NET Data Link Table Check dialog displays any errors resulting from validation
of the address details entered in the table; it is identical in appearance to the SYSMAC LINK
Data Link Table Check dialog shown earlier and is obtained in the same way.
Old Format Tables
Data Link tables were previously held in ‘.SNT’ and ‘.SN2’ file format. The File Open dialog allows these file
types to be opened in the CX-Net Network Configuration tool. Use the following procedure to open ‘.SNT’ and
‘.SN2’ formatted files.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Select the Add (old) option from the Table menu in the SYSMAC NET Data Link Table
Editor dialog.
Select a file from the Open dialog and select the Open pushbutton.
Table Information
The Data Link Table Information dialog allows the recording of comments against a particular
table and is the same both in operation and appearance, as that for the routing table comments
described earlier.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 70
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 9 – PLC Clock Tool
OMRON
CHAPTER 9
PLC Clock Tool
The PLC Clock tool provides a facility to monitor and set the PLC Clock and synchronise the PLC clock to the PC
clock.
The PLC Clock tool dialog can be set so that it remains ‘on top’ and is not obscured by other windows by clicking
the right mouse button in the task bar and selecting the Always on Top option.
To close the PLC Clock dialog, select the Close button in the title bar.
The PLC Clock tool displays two clock images that represent the time for the computer (PC) on the left and the
PLC on the right. The time and date are also represented in a digital format for both the computer and the PLC.
The times for both the Computer and the PLC are updated once a second.
A synchronise button is located centrally between the two clock images. This button once pressed, will synchronise
the PLC clock to the computer clock. The same effect can also be evoked from the Options – Synchronise Clocks
menu.
The File menu allows the PLC Clock tool to be closed by use of the Exit menu item.
The Options – Set PLC Clock allows the time and date within the PLC to be set.
If the PLC Clock window is minimised the PLC clock time will be displayed in digital format in the task bar.
CX-Server PLC Tools_Page 71
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
CHAPTER 10
Data Links
What Are Data Links?
Overview
Data links automatically exchange data in preset areas between nodes (PLCs and/or computers) on a network.
Settings can be made either manually or automatically.
CX-Net operations can be used for all operations from setting up the PLC network to controlling data exchange.
Manual Settings
Manual settings enable more flexible allocations, including the send size for each node, the sequence of nodes for
sending and receiving, and the setting of nodes for sending only or receiving only. Use manual settings to create
flexible data links to meet the requirements of the individual system (e.g., efficient utilization of memory,
restrictions on allocated addresses, etc.).
Data link tables (i.e., tables that define data link area allocations) are generated by CX-Net or network support
software (such as Controller Link Support Software), and sent to all nodes for use.
Controller Link
Controller
Link
Unit
PLC
PC
PLC
PC
PLC
PC
Only part of area
Only part of area
Note:
The following table provides a general comparison of manual setup between Controller
Link and SYSMAC LINK.
Item
Controller Link
SYSMAC LINK
Node sequence
Free
Send size
Can be specified.
Receive-only nodes
Supported
Supported
(Reception only is enabled by
setting the send area size at the
local node to 0.)
Send-only nodes
Memory area
Supported
Can be specified.
Cannot be specified. Fixed as
follows:
CS/CJ/CV Series: Area 1: CIO;
Area 2: DM
C Series: Area 1: LR; Area 2: DM
Receive size
Can be specified.
All or none
Reception offset (reception
from start address + specified
number of words)
Can be specified.
No (From start address only)
Communications cycle time
Cannot be set.
Can be set.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 73
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Automatic Settings
Automatic settings can be used for simple data exchanges involving fixed allocations, when all nodes are set for the
same send size and the same data is to be shared among all nodes in order of node address.
Using a Programming Device (such as the CX-Programmer or a Programming Console), set the data exchange
method in the DM parameter area of the startup node.
Controller
Link Link
Controller
PLC
Unit
PLC
PLC
Data exchange (shared data)
(I/O Area, LR Area, DM Area, etc.)
Note:
The following table provides a general comparison of automatic setup between
Controller Link and SYSMAC Link.
Item
Controller Link
SYSMAC LINK
Node sequence
Fixed at ascending order.
Receive-only nodes
Not supported.
Send-only nodes
Memory area
Not supported.
Can be specified. (Area 1: CIO
Area or LR Area; Area 2: DM Area
or EM Area)
Cannot be specified. Fixed as
follows:
CS/CJ/CV Series: Area 1: CIO;
Area 2: DM
C Series: Area 1: LR; Area 2: DM
Start address
Can be specified.
Cannot be specified.
Send size
Same size for all nodes can be
specified.
Same size for all nodes can be
selected from specific patterns.
This section describes how to perform Controller Link and SYSMAC LINK operations from creating data link
tables to starting up the data links.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 74
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
User Interface Overview
Datalink Component
The following illustration shows the window used when constructing Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK data links
manually.
Toolbar
Data Link
Configuration
window
Node Editing
window
Function Bar
Data Link Component Menu
Menu
File
Sub-menus/Com
mands
New
Open
Function
Creates new data link tables.
Opens data link tables, Files with any of the file name extensions
shown below can be opened.
When a file is opened, the proper editor starts up.
Controller
Link
SYSMAC
LINK
Save
Save As
♦
♦
♦
♦
cl2 – CX-Net Controller Link/CLKSS data link tables
cl3 – CX-Net Controller Link data link tables
clk – CLKSS data link tables
csv – CX-Net Controller Link data link tables (tab-delineated text
file)
♦ .sl3 – SYSMAC LINK data link tables
♦ .slk – SYSMAC LINK data link tables for SYSMAC Support
Software
♦ .csv – SYSMAC LINK data link tables (tab-delineated text file)
Saves the data link tables that are being edited.
Saves data link tables, Files with any of the file name extensions
shown below can be saved.
Controller
Link
♦
♦
♦
♦
SYSMAC
LINK
♦
♦
.cl2 – CX-Net Controller Link/CLKSS data link tables
.cl3 – CX-Net Controller Link data link tables
.clk – CLKSS data link tables
.csv – CX-Net Controller Link data link tables (tab-delineated text
file)
.sl3 – CX-Net SYSMAC LINK data link tables
.csv – CX-Net SYSMAC LINK data link tables (tab-delineated
text file)
Print
Prints data link information.
Print Preview
Previews the data to be printed.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 75
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
Menu
View
Table
Online
Options
Help
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 76
OMRON
Sub-menus/Com
mands
Function
Exit
Exits the Datalink Component window.
Move Right
Moves the cursor to the right in the Data Link Configuration window.
Move Left
Moves the cursor to the left in the Data Link Configuration window.
Move Up
Moves the cursor up in the Data Link Configuration window.
Move Down
Moves the cursor down in the Data Link Configuration window.
Change Window
Changes the active window.
Zoom Out
Zooms out from within the Data Link Configuration window.
Zoom In
Zooms in within the Data Link Configuration window.
Zoom Original
Returns the Data Link Configuration window to its initial scale.
Show in List
Shows the Data Link Area settings in list format.
Show in Table
Shows the Data Link Area settings in table format.
Show Func Bar
Shows function key guides at the bottom of the Datalink Component
window. (Enabled for table format only.)
Show Offset
Shows the specified offset value on the Node Editing window.
Wizard
Executes the Datalink Wizard.
Add Source Link
Adds a node to the data links.
Add Destination
Adds the receive area of a participating node to the data links.
Delete
Deletes nodes.
Validate Table
Checks data link tables.
Table Information
Edits data link table information.
Show Node List
Displays a list of nodes.
Redraw
Resets colored displays.
Transfer from PLC
Uploads online data link tables to the computer.
Transfer to PLC
Downloads online data link tables from the computer to a PLC.
Verify Node
Compares data link tables generated by CX-Net with data link tables
stored in the PLC. If they do not match, a error dialog box is displayed.
Data Link
Operation/Status
Displays the operation and data link status of manually set data links.
Automatic Data
Link Setup
Sets parameters for automatically set data links, and transfers them
to the startup node.
Set All Nodes for
Network Operation
Executes transfer, verify, and delete operations for all nodes.
Show All Network
Nodes
Reads data link tables from all nodes.
Delete
Deletes data link tables.
Cycle Time
Sets the communications cycle time (for SYSMAC LINK data link
tables only).
Displays help.
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Toolbar
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
No.
(7)
(8) (9)
(10) (11)
(12) (13) (14) (15)
Icon
(16) (17)
(18)
(19) (20)
Function
(1)
New
Creates new data link tables.
(2)
Show All Network Nodes
Shows all nodes in the network.
(3)
Open
Opens a data link tables, Files with any of the file name
extensions shown below can be opened.
When a file is opened, the proper editor starts up.
Controller Link
.cl2 – CX-Net Controller Link/CLKSS data link tables
.cl3 – CX-Net Controller Link data link tables
.clk – CLKSS data link tables
.csv – CX-Net Controller Link data link tables (tab-delineated
text file)
SYSMAC LINK
.sl3 – SYSMAC LINK data link tables
.slk – SYSMAC LINK data link tables for SYSMAC Support
Software
.csv – SYSMAC LINK data link tables (tab-delineated text
file)
(4)
Save
Saves the data link tables that are being edited.
(5)
Toggle Network/Single Node
Operation
Specifies either all nodes or a single node for data transfers.
(6)
Transfer to PLC
Downloads online data link tables from the computer to a PLC.
(7)
Transfer from PLC
Uploads online data link tables to the computer.
(8)
Delete
Deletes data link tables.
(9)
Verify Node
Compares data link tables generated by CX-Net with data link
tables stored in the PLC. If they do not match, a error dialog box
is displayed.
(10)
Data Link Operation/Status
Displays the operation and data link status of manually set data
links.
(11)
Automatic Data Link Setup
Sets parameters for automatically set data links, and transfers
them to the startup node.
(12)
Validate Table
Checks data link tables.
(13)
Wizard
Executes the Datalink Wizard.
(14)
Add Source Link
Adds a node to the data links.
(15)
Add Destination
Adds the receive area of a participating node to the data links.
(16)
Set Source or Destination
Link Area Properties
Displays the Node Settings dialog box. This dialog box is used
to modify the node properties.
(17)
Delete Link Destination
Service Area
Deletes nodes selected in the Data Link Configuration window,
or deletes a receive area.
(18)
Zoom In/Zoom Out/Zoom
Original
Zooms the Data Link Configuration window in or out, or returns
it to the initial scale.
(19)
Print
Prints data link information.
(20)
Help
Displays help.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 77
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Function Bar
(1)
(2)
(3)
No.
(4)
(5)
(6)
Icon
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
Function
(1)
F1: Help
Displays help.
(2)
F2: Node<->Table
Moves the focus between nodes and tables.
(3)
F3: Link Start Address
Moves the focus between settings for the link start addresses
(status, Area 1, Area 2).
(4)
F4: Move Up Area
Moves a node up the node refresh sequence.
(5)
F5: Move Down Area
Moves a node down the node refresh sequence.
(6)
F6: Show/Hide Offset
Shows or hides the offset for the node being displayed.
(7)
F7: Insert Area
Inserts a new receive area (new node).
(8)
F8: Delete Node
Deletes a node or communications area.
To delete a node or link area from a node list, select the item from
the list and then click F8: Delete Node.
To delete a node or link area from a table, select the item from the
table and then click F8: Delete Node.
(9)
F9: Show Prev Node
Shows the previous node.
(10)
F10: Show Next Node
Shows the next node.
Manually Setting Data Links
Follow the procedure described below to create data link tables manually for Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK
data links.
Note:
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 78
There is no need to create a data link tables when data links are set automatically. For
details on automatic setup, refer to Automatically Set Data Links.
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Procedure through Data Link Startup
Start the software.
Open the Datalink Component window (Data Link | Setup | Controller Link or SYSMAC
LINK or SYSMAC NET).
Creating Data Link Tables Online
1) Datalink Wizard Settings (Table | Wizard). Use the manual setting function if the data
link tables are to be created manually.
2) Node Edit Window Settings
Check the data link tables (Datalink Component window: Table | Validate Table).
Save the data link tables (Datalink Component window: File | Save).
Creating a CX-Server File (*.CDM) for Online Connection.
1) Select New from the Project menu, and save the file under a file name.
2) Select Add Device from the Project menu, and register the PLC.
Connect Online (CX-Net: PLC | Open).
Reading the Data Link Tables, and Transferring Them to the PLC from Datalink Component
window
1) Data Link | Setup
2) Select either Controller Link Unit or SYSMAC LINK Unit as the Communications Unit
mounted to the PLC. (For the local network only, i.e., when the network address is 0.)
3) File | Open
4) Online | Transfer to PLC
Starting the Data Links from the Datalink Component Window
1) Data Link | Setup
2) Select either Controller Link Unit or SYSMAC LINK Unit as the Communications Unit
mounted to the PLC. (For the local network only, i.e., when the network address is 0.)
3) Online | Data Link Operation/Status
4) Select the Run option in the Operation field, and click the Set button.
Reference: Create data link tables manually when any of the following conditions is present:
1
2
3
4
5
6
The send area size differs for nodes participating in the data link.
The sequence of send nodes differs from the sequence of node addresses.
There are nodes that receive only part of the send data (Controller Link only).
There are nodes that receive data with an offset specified (Controller Link only).
There are nodes that do not send data (Controller Link only).
There are nodes that do not receive data.
Creating Data Link Tables
Create a data link table for each node registered in the CX-Server file that is read.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 79
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Make the settings for (1) to (8) below.
(1) Participating data link nodes
(3)
Area setting
(area/start
address)
(4) Send size
(2) Node 1
PLC type
(7) Receive
sizes from
remote nodes
Node 2
(receive)
Node 1
(send)
Node 3
(receive)
Node 2
PLC
Node 3
PLC
Node 1
(receive)
Node 1
(receive)
Node 2
(send)
Node 2
(receive)
Node 3
(receive)
(8)
Offsets
Node 3
(send)
(5) Node refresh sequence:
2,
(6)
Status area
1,
3
Data link
status
1,
2,
3
2,
Data link
status
1,
3
Data link
status
To create a data link table, make the following settings in order.
1
Datalink Wizard Settings
(2) Set the PLC type.
(3) Set the areas.
(4) Set the send size.
(6) Set the status area.
(1) Set participating data link nodes.
(5) Set the refresh node sequence.
2
Node Editing Window Settings
(7) Set receive sizes from remote nodes.
(8) Set offsets.
Note 1: It is possible to add or delete nodes from the participating data link nodes (1) using the
Datalink Wizard.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 80
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Add
Delete
Adding nodes
Select Table | Add Source Link.
Adding link words
Select Table | Add Destination.
Deleting specified nodes or link areas
Select the node from the node list, and
then click F8: Delete Node.
Deleting link areas from specified nodes
Select the node from the table, and then
click F8: Delete Node.
Note 2: It is possible to change the following items set by the Datalink Wizard for each node: (2)
PLC type, (3) Area (memory area and start address), (4) Send size, (5) Node refresh
sequence (see note 3), and (6) Status area.
Note 3: The node refresh sequence is set using F4: Move Up Area and F5: Move Down Area.
Reference: The operations differ for Controller Link and SYSMAC LINK when creating data links.
The following table shows the points on which the manually set data link functions are
different.
Function
(1) Offset setting
Controller Link
Supported
SYSMAC LINK
Not supported
(2) Receive size setting
Supported
Not supported. (It is only possible
to specify whether all of none of
the data sent is to be received.)
(3) Memory area
Area 1: Can be selected.
Area 1: CIO
Area 2: Can be selected.
Area 2: DM
(CIO, LR, DM, EM, etc.,
according to PLC type)
(Fixed.)
Not supported
Supported
(4) Communications cycle time
setting
These four differences apply even to data link setup operations using the CX-Net. Aside from these points, other
operations are basically the same.
System Configuration Example
The procedure is described below, from data link creation through startup, taking a Controller Link data link
system as an example.
CX-Net
Peripheral Bus or Host Link
Data link
Data link
Controller Link network
PLC type
Node address
CS1G-CPU45
CS1G-CPU45
1
2
C200HX
3
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 81
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Data Link Setup Example
Area 1
Node 1
CIO 1000
Node 2
Node 3
CIO 1200
Receive (#1)
Send (#1)
CIO 1030
Offset
10 words
CIO 1230
300
IR
320
Size
20 words
CIO 1260
Receive (#2)
Receive (#1)
Send (#2)
Receive (#2)
CIO 1060
IR
IR
350
Send (#3)
Receive (#3)
Receive (#3)
CIO 1100
CIO 1300
CS1G
IR
390
CS1G
C200HX
Area 2
Node 2
Node 1
DM500
DM600
Receive (#1)
Send (#1)
DM530
DM630
DM730
DM660
Receive (#1)
DM760
Receive (#3)
Receive (#3)
DM600
Receive (#2)
Send (#2)
Receive (#2)
DM560
Node 3
DM700
DM700
Send (#3)
DM800
The refresh sequence for nodes 1 and 2 is as follows: #1, #2, #3. For node 3, the order is #2, #1, #3. Node address
03 does not receive all of the data sent from node address 02. Rather, data from the 20 words (CIO 1240 to CIO
1259) beginning from the start address +10 words (i.e., the offset) is received in IR 300 to IR 319. Other data is
received with no offset.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 82
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Creating Data Link Tables Offline
First create manually set data link tables offline.
Datalink Wizard Operations
1 While offline, select Setup from the Data Link menu in CX-Net. The Data Link dialog box will be displayed.
2
Select either Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK, and then click the OK button.
The Datalink Component window will be displayed.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 83
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
3
Select Table | Wizard. If data link tables have already been input, the following dialog box will be displayed.
(It will not be displayed if these are the first data link tables being created.)
4
Click the Yes button. The Datalink Wizard dialog box will be displayed for setting the participating data link
nodes.
If this box is selected, fast
default table generation will
be set when the Defaults
button is clicked. In that
case, all nodes will be set
as a group, using the initial
values that have been set.
Addresses of nodes to participate in the
data links.
Clicking the Defaults button
sets the initial values used
for fast default table
generation.
5
6
Set the addresses of the nodes that are to participate in the data links. In this case, input 1-3 to set node addresses
01 to 03. (To set node addresses 01, 02, and 04, for example, input 1,2,4.)
Click the Next button or press the Enter key. The following dialog box will be displayed.
(1)
(2)
(4)
(3)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
No.
(1)
Node
Item
Displays node number to set.
Function
(2)
PLC
Sets the PLC type.
(3)
Memory area
Area 1 memory area
Area 2 memory area
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 84
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
No.
(4)
Item
Start Address
(5)
Size
Function
Area 1 start address
Area 2 start address
Area 1 local node send size (in words)
Area 2 local node send size (in words)
(6)
Status
Data link status memory area (See note.)
(7)
Ordered Destination
Nodes
Node Refresh Sequence
Beginning with the data link start address above, specify which nodes are to
have data refreshed at the local node address and the order in which data is
to be refreshed (i.e., the node refresh sequence). This order will be the same
for Area 1 and Area 2.
(For the local node address, data is sent from the local node area. For a
remote node address, data is received from the remote node address to the
local area.)
Note: • The local node must be included in the refresh nodes.
• If the address of any node participating in the data links is not entered
here, data will not be received from that node.
Example: If 1, 2, 3 is input, node addresses 1, 2, and 3 will be allocated in
order, beginning with the start address.
(8)
Make Default
Click this button to make the values set for the above items the default values
for new data link settings.
(9)
Next >>
Click to proceed to the next dialog box.
Note: The default setting for data link status depends on the PLC being used. For details, refer to the Controller
Link Units Operation Manual (W309).
PLC
CS/CJ Series
CVM1/CV Series
Data link status
The data link status is contained in the 16 words (fixed) from CIO 1500 +25 × unit number +
7 to 22 in the CPU Bus Unit Area.
+7 words
15
Node 2
...
+22 words
C200HX/HG/HE
Node 31
Network 1
SR 243
SR 244
SR 245
15
Node 2
Node 4
Node 6
8 7
Node 1
Node 3
Node 5
0
The data link status for node addresses 1 to 6 only is contained in the words from IR 91 to IR
93.
IR 91
IR 92
IR 93
7
Node 32
0
...
The data link status for node addresses 1 to 6 only is contained in the words from SR 239 to
SR 241, and SR 241 to SR 245.
Network 0
SR 239
SR 240
SR 241
CQM1H Series
8 7
Node 1
...
15
Node 2
Node 4
Node 6
8 7
Node 1
Node 3
Node 5
0
Set node address 01 as shown in the following table, and then click the Next button or press the Enter key. Set
node addresses 02 and 03 in the same way.
Item
Data set
Description
Node address
1
−
PLC type
CS1G-CPU45
−
Area 1
Area 2
Sets CIO 1000 as the data link start
address for the Area 1 local node.
Memory area
CIO
Start address
1000
Send size
30
Sets 30 words as the send size (unit:
words) for the Area 1 local node.
Memory area
D
Start address
500
Sets D00500 as the data link start
address for the Area 2 local node.
Send size
30
Sets 30 words as the send size (unit:
words) for the Area 2 local node.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 85
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
8
OMRON
Item
Ordered destination nodes
Data set
1, 2, 3
Description
Specifies the node refresh sequence.
Beginning with the start addresses,
nodes 01, 02, and 03 are set in order.
(The local node address is 1, so
transmission is first, followed by
reception from node 02, and finally
reception from node 03.)
Status
Memory area
CIO
Start address
1100
Sets CIO 1100 as the data link status
start address.
Set node address 02 as shown in the following table.
Item
2
PLC type
CS1G-CPU45
Area 1
Description
−
−
Sets CIO 1200 as the data link start
address for the Area 1 local node.
Memory area
CIO
Start address
1200
Send size
30
Sets 30 words as the send size (unit:
words) for the Area 1 local node.
Memory area
D
Start address
600
Sets D00600 as the data link start address
for the Area 2 local node.
Send size
30
Sets 30 words as the send size (unit:
words) for the Area 2 local node.
Ordered destination nodes
1, 2, 3
Specifies the node refresh sequence.
Beginning with the start addresses, nodes
01, 02, and 03 are set in order. (Reception
from node 01 is first, followed by
transmission from the local node, and
finally reception from node 03.)
Data link status
start address
Memory area
CIO
Start address
1300
Sets CIO 1300 as the data link status start
address.
Area 2
9
Data set
Node address
Set node address 03 as shown in the following table, and then click the Next button or press the Enter key.
Item
Data set
Node address
3
PLC type
Area 1
C200HX
Description
−
−
Sets IR 300 as the data link start address
for the Area 1 local node.
Memory area
IR
Start address
300
Send size
40
Sets 40 words as the send size (unit:
words) for the Area 1 local node.
Memory area
DM
Start address
700
Sets DM 700 as the data link start address
for the Area 2 local node.
Send size
40
Sets 40 words as the send size (unit:
words) for the Area 2 local node.
Ordered destination nodes
2, 1, 3
Specifies the node refresh sequence.
Beginning with the start addresses, nodes
02, 01, and 03 are set in order. (Reception
from node 02 is first, followed by reception
from node 01, and finally transmission from
the local node address.)
Data link status
start address
Memory area
LR
Start address
0
Sets LR0 as the data link status start
address.
Area 2
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 86
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Reference: Fast Datalink Wizard Settings
It is possible to generate a table with all nodes set for the same PLC type and the same
areas (using Fast Default Table Generation), and then to modify individual nodes in the
Node Editing window as required.
Make the settings as follows:
1
Click the Defaults button and then set the default values in the following
dialog box.
2
Select the Fast Default Table Generation option, and then click the Next
button or press the Enter key.
The settings for all participating nodes will be generated at the above
default values.
♦
PLC type
♦
Memory area, data link start address, communications data size
♦
Status memory area
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 87
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Node Editing Window Settings
10 The following Datalink Component window will be displayed.
Data Link
Configuration
window
Node Editing
window
Data Link Configuration Window
Indicates the data link memory area.
Indicates the data link
memory area.
1: Area 1
2: Area 2
Participating data link node
address
The ovals indicate the send
areas (Area 1 and Area 2).
The rectangles indicate the receive
areas (Area 1 and Area 2).
The same color indicates that
data is shared among nodes.
: The arrows indicate the direction of data transfer.
Send areas are indicated by ovals in order of the addresses of nodes participating in the data links. The same color
indicates that data is shared among nodes. Therefore, with the number of participating nodes represented by n, one
oval and n-1 rectangles are shown for each node.
This window can be used to check the data sent and received between nodes.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 88
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Node Editing Window Settings
Set the data link details for each node (i.e., send size, receive size, reception offset) in the Node Editing window.
Note:
(1)
The Node Edit window appears in table format by default, as shown below. To convert
it back into the earlier list format, select View | Show in List.
(2)
(6)
(5)
(7)
(8)
(9)
The settings for each active node
shown in the node field to the left
are displayed here.
(3)
(10)
No.
(1)
Node
Description
Selects the address of the node to be edited.
) are displayed to the right.
The settings for an active node (selected with
(2)
PLC
The PLC type set by the Datalink Wizard is displayed and can be changed here.
(3)
Status
The status memory area and start address set by the Datalink Wizard are displayed and can
be changed here.
(4)
Area 1/Area 2
The Area 1 and Area 2 classifications and start addresses set by the Datalink Wizard are
displayed and can be changed here.
(5)
Node
(Display only. Order
can be changed.)
• Node addresses are displayed from top to bottom, in order of node refreshing at the local
node (in order of allocated node address).
Link Addr.
(Automatic display)
• For the local node send area, the start address of the data sent from the local node is
automatically displayed.
(6)
Name
(4)
• To change the refresh sequence set by the Datalink Wizard, click either F4: Move Up Area
or F5: Move Down Area in the Function Bar, or press the corresponding Function key.
• For the receive area from remote nodes, the local node start address for storing data
received from remote nodes is automatically displayed.
(7)
Size
(Setting/Display)
• For the local node send area, the send size set by the Datalink Wizard is displayed and can
be changed here.
• For the receive area from remote nodes, the receive size from remote nodes is set here in
word units. (It can only be set here.) The default is the entire send size from remote nodes.
(8)
Offset
(Setting/Display)
The reception offset from the source start address displayed at “Src. Addr.” is set here. (The
default is 0.)
(9)
Src. Addr.
(Automatic display)
• For the local node send area, “Send” is automatically displayed.
F4: Move Up Area
F5: Move Down
Area
Changes the node refresh sequence.
(10)
• For the receive area from a remote node, the remote node’s source start address (the
value before the offset) is automatically displayed.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 89
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Node Editing Window (Edited Node Address: Node 01)
Address at local node
Function
Address at remote node
(1)
Indicates that 20 words (D00000 to D00019) from
a remote node (node 03) are received into the area
starting from CIO 01000 (i.e., CIO 01000 to CIO
01019) at the local node (node 01).
(2)
Indicates that 30 words starting from CIO 01020
(i.e., CIO 01020 to CIO 01049) from the local
node (node 01) are sent to a remote node.
(3)
Indicates that 40 words (CIO 00200 to CIO
00239) from a remote node (node 02) are received
into the area starting from CIO 01050 (i.e., CIO
01050 to CIO 01089) at the local node (node 01).
(1)
(2)
(3)
Indicates that the node refresh sequence at the local
node (node 01) is 03 to 01 (local node) to 02.
Reference: It is also possible to display the Node Editing window in list format, as before.
Select View | Show in List from the menu. The change will go into effect the next time
the window is opened.
Node Editing window
Setting Size (Send or Receive) and Offset
♦
The send size can be set for the local node row by double-clicking in the Size cell. (The default is the size set
by the Datalink Wizard.) For remote node rows, the receive size can be set. (The default is the entire send size
from remote nodes.)
♦
The reception offset can be set by double-clicking the Offset cell. (The default is 0.)
Size and offset can be set.
Automatically displayed.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 90
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Reference: Size modifications and offsets can be set in the Area Specify dialog box that is displayed
or
by double-clicking on the data link configuration icon (oval for send area
rectangular for receive area
).
Area Specify Dialog Box (Send Area)
Specify send size.
Offset cannot be changed.
Area Specify Dialog Box (Receive Area)
Specify send size.
Offset cannot be changed.
Note:
With SYSMAC LINK, the send size can be set, but the receive size and the reception
offset cannot. Therefore, the Area Specify dialog boxes are as shown in the following
example diagrams.
• Send Area
Can be set.
• Receive Area
Cannot be set.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 91
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Changing Node Refresh Sequences
The node refresh sequence set for each node by the Datalink Wizard can be changed in the Node Editing window.
In the Node Editing window, select the node for which the refresh sequence is to be changed.
F5: Move
Down Area
Change the node refresh sequence by either clicking F4: Move Up Area or F5: Move Down Area in
the Function Bar, or pressing the F4 or F5 function keys.
Reference: The node refresh sequence for individual nodes cannot be checked in the Data Link
Configuration window. Node refresh sequence checking and changes must be
performed in the Node Editing window.
Adding Participating Nodes to Data Links
In the Node Editing window, it is possible to add nodes aside from the participating nodes set by the Datalink
Wizard’s Network Nodes setting.
The following window is displayed by selecting Table | Add Source Node from the Datalink Component menu or
by clicking the
button in the Toolbar.
Specify the node address, PLC type, and the Area 1 and Area 2 memory areas, and then click the OK button.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 92
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
The node will be added.
Added.
Deleting Nodes Added to the Data Links
Select the node to be deleted from the Node Editing window.
Delete the node by clicking the F8: Delete Node button in the Function Bar.
Caution: If the node is deleted by clicking the
button in the Toolbar, the deletion will be executed immediately.
Setting to Not Receive Data
Set the receive size to 0 in the Node Editing window.
Setting to Not Send Data
Set the send size to 0 in the Node Editing window.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 93
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Procedure Using Setup Example
Set Area 1 for each node, based on the data link setup example in the example system configuration.
Note:
The receive size and reception offset can only be set for Controller Link, and not for
SYSMAC LINK.
Setting Node Address 01
1
Select node address 01 from the node address list on the left. Node 01 will be highlighted.
Select node address 01 as the object to be edited.
The data link data for the selected node
address is displayed here.
The data link table for node address 01, the node to be edited, is displayed as a list in the Node Editing window on
the right.
Sends 30 words from the local node (node address
01), starting with CIO 01000 (i.e., CIO 01000 to CIO
01029).
Receives 30 words from node 02, starting with
CIO 01230 (i.e., CIO 01230 to CIO 01259) into
the local node area starting with CIO 01030
(i.e., CIO 01030 to CIO 01059).
Local node send area
Receive area from
remote nodes
Indicates the node refresh
sequence. (In this example,
for node address 01, no
change is required.)
Receives 40 words from node 03, starting with
CIO 00350 (i.e., CIO 00350 to CIO 00389) into
the local node area starting with CIO 01060
(i.e., CIO 01060 to CIO 01099).
Reference: With node address 01, the node refresh sequence matches the default (order of
addresses), so no change is required.
With node address 01, the size and offset are both automatically displayed as the
defaults, so no changes are required.
The size and offset can be set.
Automatically displayed.
2. With node address 01, the node refresh sequence matches the default (order of addresses), so no change is
required.
With node address 01, the size and offset are both automatically displayed as the defaults, so no changes are
required.
Settings for area 2 are made using the same method.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 94
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Setting Node Address 02
Node address 02 is set in the same way as node address 01.
Local node send area
Receive area from remote nodes
Setting Node Address 03 (Setting an Offset)
For node address 03, the procedure for setting the node refresh sequence and the offset is as follows:
1
2
Select node address 03 from the node address list on the left.
With node address 03, the node refresh sequence does not match the default, so the order of addresses must be
changed. Change the node refresh sequence by either clicking F4: Move Up Area or F5: Move Down Area in
the Function Bar, or pressing the F4 or F5 function keys.
F5: Move Down Area
3
Double-click on the Offset cell, and input the data size to be offset. In this example, set the offset size to 10
words.
With this setting, 20 words sent from node 01 will be received, starting from CIO 1000, and with an offset of 10
words (i.e., CIO 1010 to CIO 1030).
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 95
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Checking Data Link Tables
1
Select Table | Validate Table in the Data Link Editor (Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK). The results of the
check will be displayed as shown in the following illustration.
Printing Data Link Tables
Follow the procedure below to print data link tables that have been generated.
1
Select File | Print in the Data Link Editor (Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK).
Printing Example:
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 96
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Saving Data Link Tables
Follow the procedure below to save data link tables that have been generated. Data link tables are saved with a .cl3
file name extension as the default. It is also possible to save them in .csv format.
1
2
Select File | Save As in the Data Link Editor (Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK). The Save As dialog box will
be displayed.
Input the file name (“Sample” in this example), and specify the location where the file is to be saved. Then click
the Save button. The data will be saved to a file with a .cl3 extension added to the file name (i.e., “Sample.cl3”
in this case).
Creating, Reading, and Writing CSV Files (Saving)
Creating CSV Files
Based on the CSV-format template file (Sample1.csv) provided with this software, it is possible to create files in
CSV format for data link tables created manually using spreadsheet software (such as MS Excel).
Including the Sample1.csv file, there are three types of files provided as reference material. The other two, in
addition to Sample1.csv, are Sample1.xls (which describes tags and data), and Sample1.cl2 (data link table file
format).
(Sample1.xls window)
Reading CSV Files
Files in CSV format can be read to data link tables.
1
2
Select Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK in the main CX-Net window (Data Link | Setup in the CX-Net
PLC Network Configuration Tool dialog box). The Datalink Component dialog box will be displayed.
Select Open from the File menu, and then select *.csv from the File of Type field.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 97
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Writing CSV Files (Saving)
Once data link tables have been created, they can be written to CSV-format files.
1
Select Save As from the File menu in the Datalink Component dialog box, and then select *.csv from the File of
Type field.
The following illustration provides an example of a written CSV file.
(1)
Network ID
parameters
(2) Participating
node parameters
(3) Area 1
parameters
(4) Area 2
parameters
Note:
When displayed by spreadsheet software (such as MS Excel).
Types of Data Written to CSV Files
Tag name
(1)
<netparam>
Description
The network type (CLK/SLK).
<network-type>
SLK network: SLK
The communications cycle
time.
5 to 255. Enabled only when
<network –type> is set to SLK, and
ignored when <network-type> is set
to CLK. An error will be generated if
an out-of-range value is set when a
file is loaded.
The name of the author
Set any text string (with up to 30
characters). Enabled only when
<network –type> is set to SLK.
<cycletime>
<author>
SLK: (Table information) author
<information>
Input file information.
(Title or node
information)
CLK: Node information
<comment>
Set any text string (with up to 30
characters).
SLK: (Table information) title
Comment.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 98
Set value
CLK network: CLK
SLK: (Table information)
comment
Set any text string (with up to 255
characters). Enabled only when
<network –type> is set to SLK, and
ignored when <network-type> is set
to CLK.
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
(2)
<node-param>
Tag name
<node>
(Node No.)
<cpu>
Description
The node No.
for the link.
Set value
1 to 62. An error will be generated if an out-of-range
value is set when a file is loaded.
The PLC type
for the node.
CS1G, CS1G-H, CS1H, CS1H-H, CJ1G, CJ1G-H,
CJ1H-H, CJ1M, CS1D-H, CS1D-S, CV500, CV1000,
CV2000, CVM1, CVM1-V2, CQM1H, C200HE,
C200HE-Z, C200HG, C200HG-Z, C200HX, C200HX-Z,
NSB, CS/CJ/CP
The CPU model
for the node.
CS1G: CPU42, CPU43, CPU44, CPU45
(PLC type)
CS1G-H: CPU42, CPU43, CPU44, CPU45
CS1H: CPU63, CPU64, CPU65, CPU66, CPU67
CS1H-H: CPU63, CPU64, CPU65, CPU66, CPU67
CS1G/CJ1G: CPU44, CPU45
CJ1G-H: CPU42, CPU43, CPU44, CPU45
CJ1H-H: CPU65, CPU66, CPU67
CJ1M, CP1H: Not specified.
CS1D-H: CPU65, CPU67
CS1D-S: CPU42, CPU44, CPU65, CPU67
CV500: Not specified.
<cpu-type>
CV1000: Not specified.
(CPU model)
CV2000: Not specified.
CVM1: CPU01, CPU11, CPU21
CVM1-V2: Not specified.
CQM1H: CPU51, CPU61
C200HE: Not specified.
C200HE-Z: Not specified.
C200HG: Not specified.
C200HG-Z: Not specified.
C200HX: Not specified.
C200HX-Z: Not specified.
C200HX-Z: CPU65, CPU85
NSB: Not specified.
The status start
address and the
memory area.
Any of the following memory areas can be specified,
regardless of the PLC type.
Initial value: Default (See note.)
CIO: Blank, CIO, or IR
DM: D or DM
<status-start-type>
LR: L or LR
(Status start address,
memory area)
EM: E + Bank No.
HR: H or HR
AR: A or AR
T/C: T/C
Note: Data link status is stored in the default area. For
details, refer to the Unit's operation manual.
<status-start-ch>
(Status area start
address)
The start
address for the
status area.
The range differs depending on the status area type.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 99
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
(3)
<area1>
OMRON
Tag name
<start-type>
Description
Specify the area type for Link Area 1.
Set value
Same as for status area type.
The beginning word for Link Area 1.
Same as for status area start
address.
Node
address
The node address for linking
at Link Area 1.
1 to 62
Link word
The beginning link word for
Link Area 1.
Set the link start address + link
size for the above link node.
Size
(Unit:
words)
The link size for Link Area 1.
Set any value.
Offset
The offset size for Link Area
1.
Set any value. If no offset is
required, set 0.
(Link Area 1 type)
<start-ch>
(Link Area 1 start
address)
Node No.
Link start
address
<linkarea>
Link size
Offset size
(4)
<area2>
<start-type>
The area type for Link Area 2.
Same as for status area type.
The beginning word for Link Area 2.
Same as for status area start
address.
Node
address
The node address for
linking at Link Area 2.
1 to 62
Link word
The beginning link word for
Link Area 2.
Set the link start address + link
size for the above link node.
Size (Unit:
words)
The link size for Link Area 2.
Set any value.
Offset
The offset size for Link Area
2.
Set any value. If no offset is
required, set 0.
(Link Area 2 type)
<start-ch>
(Link Area 2 start
address)
Node No.
Link start
address
<linkarea>
Link size
Offset size
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 100
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
An example text data configuration for a CSV file is shown below.
Note:
Commas are used for delineation. (They are added when there are blank cells.)
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 101
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Connecting Online
After the PLC has been registered, select either of the following types of registered PLCs for connecting online,
depending on the CX-Net function used.
1) PLCs registered for direct connection
2) PLCs registered as nodes on a network
PLC registered for online connection
CX-Net function
Data link table
transfer
Note:
Controller Link
(1) PLC registered for direct
connection (node
address 0)
Not supported. (See note.)
(2) PLC registered as node on a
network (node address 01 or
higher)
Supported
SYSMAC LINK
Not supported. (See note.)
Supported
SYSMAC NET
Supported
Not supported.
If there is a routing table, node address 0 is possible.
When transferring Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK data link tables, therefore, online connection is required for
PLCs registered as nodes on a network.
Example: Connecting PLC1 (Registered as a Node on a Network) Online
1
2
In the CX-Net project workspace, select the PLC to be connected online.
In the project workspace, select PLC1, and then select Open from the PLC menu.
PLC1 will be connected online, and the display will change as follows:
Select PLC1, and
then select Open
from the PLC
menu.
Changes to green when online.
The online/offline status and the
PLC’s operation mode are displayed.
To go back offline, again select Open from the PLC menu.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 102
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Reading and Transferring Data Link Tables
After a data link table has been created, follow the procedure below for reading it and transferring it to all nodes
participating in the data links.
Reading the Data Link Table
1 Select Data Link | Setup from the CX-Net.
The Data Link Setup dialog box will be displayed. (For local network only, i.e., when network address is 0.)
Clicking on this down arrow will
display the Communications
Units mounted to the PLC, as
shown below.
2
Select Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK, and then click the OK button.
Either the Datalink Component (Controller Link) or Datalink Component (SYSMAC LINK) window will be
displayed.
3
Select File | Open.
The Open dialog box will be displayed.
Select the data link table file (Sample.cl3 in this example,) and then click the Open button.
4
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 103
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
The data link tables will be read as shown below.
Note:
Before selecting Data Link Setup, make sure that the PLC can be connected online.
Transferring the Data Link Table
Transferring to All Nodes on the Network
1
2
Select Set All Nodes for Network Operation from the Datalink Component’s Online menu. Selecting this
operation allows the data link tables to be transferred simultaneously to multiple PLCs.
Select Online | Transfer to PLC. The following dialog box will be displayed.
3
4
Click the Yes button.
An error list will be displayed.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 104
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
5
6
The data link tables will be transferred.
The transfer results will be displayed.
Note:
Note:
As long as all the data link tables can be transferred to all of the PLCs attempted, Set All
Nodes for Network Operation can be selected to transfer the data link tables
simultaneously to multiple PLCs. If there are any PLCs with the power turned OFF, or
with disconnected cables, use the following method to transfer the data link table to one
PLC at a time.
• CX-Programmer (CX-Net) Ver. 3.2 or later is required to use the
Controller Link Support Board as a Network Support Board (NSB).
• When using a SYSMAC Link Support Board or CX-Programmer
(CX-Net) Ver. 3.1 or earlier, data link tables can be transferred only to
a single Network Support Board (NSB) node. Always use the following
method to transfer data link tables to all the nodes on the network.
1. Use the mouse to select any node other than the Network Support
Board in the Data Link Configuration window or the Node
Editing window of the Datalink Component window.
2. Select Set All Nodes for Network Operation from the Online
menu in the Data Component window.
3. Select Transfer to PLC from the Online menu.
4. The data link tables are transferred after the check is completed.
Transferring to Individual Nodes on the Network
1
Select the transfer destination node address from the Node list in the Datalink Component.
Make sure that Set All Nodes for Network Operation is not selected in the Online menu.
2
Select Online | Transfer to PLC. The following dialog box will be displayed.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 105
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
3
4
5
6
OMRON
Click the Yes button.
An error list will be displayed.
The data link tables will be transferred.
The transfer results will be displayed.
Starting and Stopping Data Links (Including Status Displays)
Before performing the operations described below, connect online to a node where the data link table has been
transferred. As long as the data link table is stored there, data link starting and stopping can be executed from any
node.
Note:
When starting data links with manual setup, the data link mode for the startup node must
be set to manual.
Starting Data Links
1 Select Data Link | Setup from the CX-Net.
The Data Link Setup dialog box will be displayed. (For local network only, i.e., when network address is 0.)
Clicking on this down arrow will
display the Communications
Units mounted to the PLC, as
shown below.
2
Select Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK, and then click the OK button.
Either the Datalink Component (Controller Link) or Datalink Component (SYSMAC LINK)
window will be displayed.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 106
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
3
Select Datalink Operation/Status from the Online menu.
The Datalink Status dialog box will be displayed. As shown below, the status of various items is displayed. The
communications cycle time and refresh cycle time are updated only when this window is opened or when the
PLC operating status is changed.
Select either the Run or
Stop option and then
click the Set button.
4
5
Select the Run option in the Operation field.
Click the Set button.
The data links will start, and the Operational Status box will be displayed.
Note: • The data link mode (manual/automatic) and data link operation are determined by the
data link setup at the startup node. With manual setting the links, it is necessary to set,
for the startup node, the data link table and the data link mode (manual setting) in the
DM parameter area. If these are not set correctly, the data links will not start.
• Check the following points before starting the data links.
With manual setting, the appropriate data link table must be set for each node executing
the data links. Data link tables must be deleted for nodes that are not participating in the
data links. Also, even when the correct data link tables are set, make sure that there will
be no effect on the equipment before starting or stopping the data links.
Stopping Data Links
1 Click the Stop option in the Operation field of the Datalink Status dialog box.
2 Click the Set button.
The data links will be stopped.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 107
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Automatically Set Data Links
This section explains how to make the settings for automatically set data links.
Make the settings in the Automatic Datalink (Controller Link) or Automatic Datalink (SYSMAC LINK) dialog
box.
First make the settings for data link operation at PLC startup, and for the automatic data link setup parameters, and
then transfer the data to the startup node.
When using automatically set data links, there is no need to create data link tables with the Data Link Editor.
Procedure Through Data Link Startup
Create a CX-Server file (*.CDM) for connecting online.
1) Select New from the Project menu and save the setting under a file name.
2) Select Add Device from the Project menu, and register the PLC (as a node on the
network).
Connect online to the startup node PLC (registered as a node on the network).
(Select the startup node PLC and then select PLC | Open from the CX-Net.)
Set the automatic data link setup parameters.
1) Select Data Link | Setup.
2) Select Controller Link Unit or SYSMAC LINK Unit as the Communications Unit
mounted to the PLC. (For the local network only, i.e. when the network address is 0.)
3) Select PLC | Setup in the Datalink Component window.
4) Select Automatic in the Generation Type field in the Automatic Datalink dialog box,
and make the settings for the automatically set data link areas (start word, size, and
nodes participating in data links, for Area 1 and Area 2).
4) To have the data links started when
the PLC is started, set Start for the
status at startup.
Transfer the automatic data link setup parameters to the startup node. (Click the
Write button.)
Turn ON the power to the PLC.
Start the data links.
Datalink Component Data Link Status
operation
1) Online | Status
2) Select the Run option in the Operation
field, and then click the Set button.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 108
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Controller Link Automatic Setup
1
2
Before executing the following operations, connect online to the PLC that is serving as the startup node.
Select Data Link | Setup from the CX-Net. (For local network only, i.e., when network address is 0.)
Clicking on this down arrow will
display the Communications
Units mounted to the PLC, as
shown below.
3
Select Controller Link, and then click the OK button.
The Datalink Component (Controller Link) window will be displayed.
4
Select Automatic Datalink Setup from the Online menu.
The Automatic Datalink (Controller Link) dialog box will be displayed.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 109
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
♦
OMRON
Controller Link
Select Automatic.
(If Manual is
selected, data link
tables created by
the user will be
used.)
Reads settings
data from the PLC.
Transfers settings
data to the PLC.
Select Start in
order to have data
links start when the
PLC is started.
If Automatic is
selected, data link
parameters can be
set.
When Read or
Write is executed,
the results are
displayed here.
5
Select Start or Stop in the Power Up Run State field.
Note:
Selecting Start causes the data links to start when the PLC is powered up, without having
to perform any other data link startup operation.
When Automatic is selected, the automatic data link setup parameters can be set, as
shown below.
♦
Controller Link
Make the settings for Area
1. Set the area for
executing the data links,
the start word, and the
size.
Make the settings for Area
2. Set the area for
executing the data links,
the start word, and the
size.
7
Set the automatic data link setup parameters.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 110
Set the status start
word.
Set the nodes
participating in the
data links.
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
SYSMAC LINK Automatic Setup
1
2
Before executing the following operations, connect online to the PLC that is serving as the startup node.
Select Data Link | Setup from the CX-Net. (For local network only, i.e., when network address is 0.)
Clicking on this down arrow will
display the Communications
Units mounted to the PLC, as
shown below.
3
Select SYSMAC LINK, and then click the OK button.
The Datalink Component (SYSMAC LINK) window will be displayed.
4
Select Automatic Datalink Setup from the Online menu.
The Automatic Datalink (SYSMAC LINK) dialog box will be displayed.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 111
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Select for manual
setup.
Reads settings data
from the PLC.
For automatic
setup, select CIO
only, DM only, or
CIO and DM.
Transfers settings
data to the PLC.
For automatic setup,
select from among the
following areas and
words.
• CIO 04CH, DM 08CH
• CIO 08CH, DM 16CH
• CIO 16CH, DM 32CH
• CIO 32CH, DM 64CH
5
Select the memory area for automatic setup (CIO Area only, DM Area only, or CIO and DM Areas), and select
the area and word settings from the following list.
Reference
Word Allocations for SYSMAC LINK Automatic Setup (Example: CS/CJ Series, CVM1/CV Series)
Area and word settings
CIO Area (words)
DM Area (words)
CIO: 4
words
CIO: 8 words
DM: 16
words
DM: 8
words
CIO 1000 to CIO 1003
D00000 to D00007
#1
CIO 1004 to CIO 1007
D00008 to D00015
#2
CIO 1008 to CIO 1011
D00016 to D00023
#3
CIO 1012 to CIO 1015
D00024 to D00031
#4
CIO 1016 to CIO 1019
D00032 to D00039
#5
CIO 1020 to CIO 1023
D00040 to D00047
#6
CIO 1024 to CIO 1027
D00048 to D00055
#7
CIO 1028 to CIO 1031
D00056 to D00063
#8
CIO 1032 to CIO 1035
D00064 to D00071
#9
CIO 1036 to CIO 1039
D00072 to D00079
#10
CIO 1040 to CIO 1043
D00080 to D00087
#11
CIO 1044 to CIO 1047
D00088 to D00095
#12
CIO 1048 to CIO 1051
D00096 to D00103
#13
CIO 1052 to CIO 1055
D00104 to D00111
#14
CIO 1056 to CIO 1059
D00112 to D00119
#15
CIO 1060 to CIO 1063
D00120 to D00127
#16
CIO: 16
words
CIO: 32
words
DM: 32
words
DM: 64
words
#1
31
#2
#1
#3
#2
#4
#5
#3
#6
#2
#7
#4
#8
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 112
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Transferring Automatic Data Link Setup Parameters to the Startup Node
The automatic data link parameters that have been set are then sent to the connected startup node PLC. It is also
possible to read the automatic data link parameters that have been set for the PLC.
Transferring Data to the Startup Node PLC
1 Click the Write button in either the Automatic Datalink (Controller Link) or the Automatic Datalink Setup
dialog box.
The following dialog box will be displayed for confirmation.
2
Click the Yes button.
The set data will be transferred to the startup node PLC.
Note: • The data link mode (manual/automatic) and data link operation are determined by the
data link setup at the startup node. With automatic setup, it is necessary to set, for the
startup node, the data link mode (automatic) and the number of data link words in the
Automatic Datalink Setup dialog box. If these are not set correctly, the data links will
not start.
• Before starting the data links with automatic setup, make sure that the correct automatic
data link setup parameters are set for the data link startup node. If incorrect automatic
data link setup parameters are set, it may cause the equipment to operate unpredictably.
Even when the correct parameters are set, make sure that there will be no adverse effect
on the equipment before starting or stopping the data links.
Reading Data from the Startup Node
Perform this operation to check or change settings.
1
Click the Read button in either the Automatic Datalink (Controller Link) or the Automatic Datalink Setup
dialog box.
The following dialog box will be displayed for confirmation.
2
Click the Yes button.
The set data will be transferred from the PLC and displayed at the Automatic Datalink (Controller Link) or the
Automatic Datalink Setup dialog box.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 113
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
Monitoring Data Link Status
Monitoring Data Link Status, Such as Communications Cycle Time
1 Select the startup node PLC in the Project workspace.
2 Select Open from the PLC menu to connect online.
3 Select Data Link | Setup.
4 Select Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK, and then click the OK button. The Datalink Component dialog
box will be displayed.
5 Select Online and then Datalink Operation/Status. The Data Link Status dialog box will be displayed.
6 The following items will be displayed in the Network Properties field:
Data link start word, polling node number, communications cycle time, and data link refresh cycle time
PV/maximum value.
The following items will be displayed in the Operational Status field for each node:
CPU Unit error status, data link operation status, CPU unit operation mode, and communications status
Monitoring Data Link Status and Network Error Status from CX-Net
1 While online, open the I/O table window and select either Controller Link or SYSMAC LINK. Right-click
and select the software switch.
2 The following items can be monitored for a particular Controller Link Unit.
Tag name
General
Contents
Displays the words allocated in the CIO and DM Areas.
Error Information
Network parameter errors, data link table errors, routing table errors,
PLC setup errors, EEPROM write errors, node address duplication
errors, network parameter verification errors, communications
controller transmission errors, communications controller errors, and
error log
Data Link
Startup node address, polling node address, and local node data link
participation status
Data link status as seen from each node (PLC operation status, PLC
errors, communications errors, data link participation status, offset
errors, and reception area insufficient or surplus space)
Network Status
Network participation status for each node
Status
Termination resistance status, power ON status
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 114
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 10 – Data Links
OMRON
The following items can be monitored for a particular SYSMAC LINK Unit.
Tag name
General
Contents
Displays the words allocated in the CIO and DM Areas.
Error Information
Data link errors, node setting errors, routing table errors,
communications controller errors, communications setting errors, data
verification errors, duplicate No. errors, parameter errors, error logs,
and EPROM write errors
Network Status
Local node address, local network address, polling node local address,
unit number, power supply, internode test, and network node address
Data Link
Data link status (PLC operation status, PLC errors, communications
errors, data link participation status, offset errors, and reception area
insufficient space or surplus space)
Internode Test
(Parameters) (See
note.)
Test beginning and end, test destination node address, test destination
network address, number of bytes sent, and response monitor timer
values
Internode Test
(Results) (See note.)
Test destination address, test destination network address, number of
bytes sent, response monitor timer values, number of resend errors,
number of non-responses, number of frame overruns, number of tests,
number of errors, number of token timeouts, number of relay node
routing failures, number of local node routing failures, routing error
MRES, routing error node address, number of times local node failed to
participate, number of times data did not match, number of times test
destination node busy, routing error SRES, routing error network
address, and test status
Note:
Supported for CVM1 and CV-series SYSMAC LINK Units only.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 115
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 11 – Routing Tables
OMRON
CHAPTER 11
Routing Tables
Routing tables allow networked PLCs to be configured so that they can communicate with each other via gateways;
across remote networks. The routing tables contain the network, unit number information required. It is only
necessary to set up routing tables if the end connection PLC is not a direct connection, i.e. using another PLC as a
gateway connection. The routing table is held within the PLC(s) which acts as the gateway device. Different types
of PLC and networks have different capabilities for routing.
PLC
Network
Routing Table
C-series
SYSMAC LINK
N/A
C-series
SYSMAC NET
C-SYSMAC NET
C-series
Controller Link
FINS
C-series
Ethernet
N/A
CV-series
SYSMAC LINK, SYSMAC NET,
Ethernet or Controller Link
FINS
CS1-series
SYSMAC LINK, Device Net,
Controller Link or Ethernet
FINS
CJ1-series
SYSMAC LINK, Device Net,
Controller Link or Ethernet
FINS
The Routing Table menus are accessed from the PLC Network Configuration Tool dialog and contain options
allowing the editing and setup of routing tables both offline and online. The routing tables which are being used in
a network, can be viewed online.
Different online Routing Table Setup dialogs are used, depending upon the protocol associated with the routing
table. The way in which they are displayed and operate is similar in each case.
The PLC Network Configuration Tool dialog, visually displays the structure of the routing table associated with the
PLC (including the destination node and network gateway employed in directing data across the network). Initially
the visual representation of the routing table is empty, or set to zero, until a routing table file has been opened. An
overview of the routing table can also be viewed and edited in a graphical or tabular format.
Opening an existing Routing Table
Use the following procedure to open an existing routing table in a project.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Open the PLC Network Configuration Tool dialog from the Routing Table menu,
select Editor, and then the type of table.
From the Routing Table File menu select Open Routing Table File.
3.
From the list of possible files, select the file to be opened.
The following procedure can also be used as a shortcut to opening an existing routing table.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
Open the PLC Network Configuration Tool dialog and from the Project menu
options select Open.
In the Open Project dialog select the File Type as All Files(*.*)
4.
In the Open Project dialog select the appropriate device type and click the Open
button.
From the list in the Project Devices window select the network to be opened.
5.
From the Routing Table menu, select Editor and then the required network type.
Note:
Routing tables have an ‘.RT2’ (SYSMAC NET), ‘.RTG’ for FinsLocal or ‘.RT3’
(FINS) Network filename extension.
Creating a new Routing Table
Use the following procedure to create a new routing table within a project.
1, 2, 3…
1.
Open the PLC Network Configuration Tool dialog from the Project menu options
and select New.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 117
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 11 – Routing Tables
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
OMRON
In the Create Project dialog enter a file name for the new table, navigate to the
folder where the file is to be saved and click the Save button.
From the PLC Network Configuration Tool Project menu select Add Device.
In the Add PLC dialog Enter a Device Name and select a Device Type and
Network Type from the dropdown menu. And click OK.
From the PLC Network Configuration Tool click on the device name in the
Project Device window.
From the Routing Table menu, select Editor and then the required network type.
Adding a Local Network
Use the following procedure to add a local network to a routing table.
1, 2, 3…
1.
Open the PLC Routing Table window and select the SIOU tab in the left hand
pane and the Main View tab in the right hand pane.
2.
3.
Select the Unit from the SIOU list to which the local network is to be added then
right click on the that unit and select the Insert CPU SIOU option.
From the Enter SIOU Details dialog enter the:
4.
Local Network Number. This is the ID number that uniquely identifies the local
network in the routing table. Each new network must be given a unique ID
number in the range of 1 to 127.
Local Network Type. Select the type of local network from the drop down
menu. The network type selected will be displayed in the diagram.
Click OK to close the SIOU dialog and add the local network to the selected unit.
Note: The serial port of the CPU Unit and the serial port of the Serial Communications Board/Unit
(unit version 1.2 or later) are displayed in the Unit directory in the SIOU Tab on the left.
Right-click and select Insert CPU SIOU to set the local network address in the serial port and
register in the local network table.
The serial port’s unit number as a CPU Bus Unit or Special I/O Unit are automatically allocated
and cannot be changed.
The Unit and the Unit’s serial port cannot be registered in the local network table at the same
time.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 118
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 11 – Routing Tables
OMRON
Adding a Remote Network
Use the following procedure to add a remote connection to a local network.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open the PLC Routing Table dialog and select the SIOU tab in the left hand pane
and the Main View tab in the right hand pane.
With the cursor positioned over the local network click the right mouse button.
From the pop up menu select the Add connection to Remote Network option.
(selecting the Change Local Network option enables the local network number to
be changed).
In the Enter Relay Node Details dialog enter the:
Relay node number. This is the ID number of the relay node. Relay Nodes can
be given any ID number in the range 1 to 254.
Remote Network number. This is the ID number that will uniquely identify the
remote connection. Each new remote connection must be given a unique ID
number in the range 1 to 127.
Note that a remote network can not be given the same ID number as an existing
Local Network.
Click OK. This will add the remote connection with the specified ID number
(shown in red) to the Local Network. A maximum of 20 remote connections can
be added to a network.
Finally from the Options menu check the table for Errors
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 119
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 11 – Routing Tables
OMRON
Editing the Routing Table
Open the appropriate routing table from the Network Configuration Tool dialog then use the following procedure
to edit the table.
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
Local Network:
♦
In the Routing Table dialog right click on the Unit to be edited and select the
appropriate option from the pop up menu.
♦
To save the changes select the Save option from the File menu
Relay Node:
♦
3.
Right click on the Relay node and select the appropriate option from the pop up
menu.
Remote Network:
♦
Right click on the remote network and select the appropriate option from the pop up
menu.
Error Checking
Use the following procedure to view any validation errors.
1, 2, 3…
1.
Either:
♦
Select Check routing table for errors from the Edit menu in the Routing Table
Editor dialog box.
♦
Click the in the toolbar. A message box will be displayed indicating success or
failure.
Or
Additional Features
The Network View Screen
The Network tree view is used to display the nodes on the locally connected network and is only available when the
local connection network is an OMRON proprietary network, such as a Controller Link, Sysmac link, Sysmac Net
or SYSWAY.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 120
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 11 – Routing Tables
OMRON
This icon is used to indicate that a node is present at this node number.
This icon is used to indicate that node is not present at this node number.
This icon is used to represent the currently selected node.
This icon is used to indicate that a node is present at this node number but there are
errors reading the routing table.
The Overview Screen
Selecting the Overview tab will show all the routing tables in an graphical format. The relay node numbers are
shown in the whites boxes and the remote network numbers in the red boxes. The numbers on the right are the Local
Network numbers.
Note that the tables can not be edited in this view.
Table View Screen
The Table View screen provides a method of setting the routing table by means of a tabular view.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 121
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 11 – Routing Tables
OMRON
The screen is comprised of two main sections:
♦
The local settings (Left hand side)
♦ The remote settings (right hand side)
The local settings section allows a series of entries for the SIOU (Special Input/Output Unit) and it’s corresponding
Local Network number.
The remote settings section allows a series of entries for the Remote Network number, it’s corresponding Relay
Network number and it’s corresponding Relay Node number.
The slider control to the right of each section can be used to bring any more than the eight entries into view if so
required.
Each of the data entry fields have their own individual set of spin buttons, which when pressed will increment or
decrement the value. The number can also be entered normally using the number keypad on the user keyboard.
Three control buttons can be found at the bottom of the screen:
♦
Ok button: Once all data entry has been completed, selecting the ‘Ok’ button will check the table entries for
errors. If the check fails, an error description dialog will be displayed. If the check does not detect any errors
the Main Screen will be displayed.
♦
Restore button: If during data entry, the user wished to revert back to the table state that was in effect before
the Table View was displayed; The user should select the Restore button.
♦
Cancel button: This button will cancel any changes made whilst the Table View was being displayed and then
display the Main View screen.
Note:
For CS/CJ-series PLC of Ver. 2.0 or CP-series PLC or later with CX-Programmer Ver.
4.0 or later, FINS commands can be used to access nodes up to eight network levels
away, including the local network.
Gateway Counter Settings
Gateway Counter Framework
When sending FINS commands or returning FINS responses in a FINS network, the GCT (Gateway
counter: Permissible number of times a network bridge can be crossed) is set in the FINS header of the
FINS command frame. When the FINS response is received, the GCT is automatically reduced by the
number of network levels that were accessed. Therefore, the GCT setting corresponds to the number of
network levels that can be accessed, as follows:
• GCT = 02 hex: Access to up to three network levels away.
• GCT = 07 hex: Access to up to eight network levels away (the network configuration, however, must
use PLCs for which the Gateway counter (GCT) is set to 07 hex).
Gateway Counter Setting
When using CX-Programmer Ver.5.0 or later, the GCT (Gateway counter) value contained in the
FINS header can be set under Set Gateway Counter in the Routing Table Dialog Box.
Note: CX-Programmer Ver.4.0 or earlier do not provide the GCT (Gateway counter) setting option.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 122
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 11 – Routing Tables
OMRON
Setting the Gateway Counter Value for Each PLC
The GCT value setting range depends on the CPU Unit being used, as follows:
• CS/CJ-series CPU Unit Ver. 3.0 or CP-series CPU Unit
The GCT (Gateway counter) value can be set to 02 hex or 07 hex.
Set the GCT value under Set Gateway Counter during routing table setup using the following
procedure.
1. Setting the Gateway Counter Offline:
Open the PLC Routing Table window, select the Unit Tab in the directory list, and then right-click
the icon for the local PLC node.
Setting the Gateway Count Online:
Open the PLC Routing Table window, select the Network Tab in the directory list, and then
right-click the icon for a PLC node in the network.
The following Gateway Counter Setting Dialog Box will be displayed.
2. Select either Standard or Expand(7), and then click the OK Button.
Standard: Communications across up to three network levels (GCT = 02 hex)
Expand(7): Communications across up to eight network levels (GCT = 07 hex)
The GCT value will be displayed in the Main View, Overview, and Table View Screens.
Main View
Overview
Table View
• CS/CJ-series CPU Units with Unit Ver. 2.0 or CP-series CPU Units
The GCT (Gateway counter) is always 07 hex. The number of network levels that can be accessed is
always a maximum of eight network levels and cannot be set to a maximum of three network levels.
When CX-Programmer (CX-Net) Ver.5.0 or later is used, the Standard and Expand(7) options in the
Gateway Counter Setting Dialog Box in the Routing Table Setup are both ignored. When routing
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 123
CX-Server PLC Tools
CHAPTER 11 – Routing Tables
OMRON
tables are transferred to a CS/CJ-series CPU Unit with unit Ver. 2.0 or CP-series CPU Unit, the
GCT (Gateway counter) is always 07 hex, and therefore uses the Expand mode.
• Pre-Ver. 2.0 CS/CJ-series CPU Units and CVM1/CV-series CPU Units
The GCT (Gateway counter) is always 02 hex. Therefore, access to a maximum of three network levels
away is possible.
When CX-Programmer (CX-Net) Ver.5.0 or later is used, always select the Standard option in the
Gateway Counter Setting Dialog Box during the routing table setup. If Expand(7) is selected, the
routing tables cannot be transferred.
Transferring a Routing Table to a PLC
Once a routing table has been created or edited, the routing table may be transferred to the PLC using the following
steps:
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
If the Network Configuration Tool is ‘on-line’ to a PLC, skip to 4.
Save the current routing table using the Routing Table Edit menu: File – Save
Routing Table. (Add Author and comment if required).
Go ‘on-line’ to the PLC. See section 10 – The Network Configuration Tool for
details of this operation.
From the CX-Net menu select: Routing Table - Setup
From the Routing Table menu select: File – Open Routing Table.
Select the previously created filename and select open. Or, alternatively the
routing table can be created.
From the Routing Table Editor menu select: Options – Transfer to PLC.
Transferring a Routing table from a PLC
The routing table held within a PLC may be transferred from the PLC using the following steps:
1, 2, 3…
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Go ‘on-line’ to the PLC. See section 10 – The Network Configuration Tool for
details of this operation.
From the CX-Net menu select: Routing Table - Setup
From the Routing Table Editor menu select: Options – Transfer from PLC.
The routing table may then be saved to file by: From the Routing Table menu
select: File – Save Routing Table.
Enter a suitable filename and select Save.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 124
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX A – Network Availability
OMRON
APPENDIX A
Network Availability
The following tables indicate the network available to each PLC device group. FinsGateway has no network
availability and is not described
Note:
Modem connection is also available by Toolbus or SYSMAC WAY if a Modem device
has been configured in Microsoft Windows. Any device supporting Toolbus or
SYSMAC WAY also supports Modem connections. Refer to standard Microsoft
Windows documentation for details on configuring a Modem device.
Note:
Where DeviceNet is indicated as an available network type for a given PLC, direct
connection from a PC is not possible (No NSB support). Instead, connect via a Serial
Port (COM1 etc.), or an another network type.
C**H Device Group
Device
Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
C20H
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
C28H
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
C40H
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
C60H
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
C**K Device Group
Device
Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
C20K
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
C28K
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
C40K
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
C60K
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
C**P Device Group
Device
Type
SYSMAC
WAY
C20P
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
C28P
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
C40P
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
C60P
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
C1000H Device Group
Device
Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU01
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
C20 Device Group
Device
Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
C20
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 125
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX A – Network Availability
OMRON
C2000H Device Group
Device
Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU01
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
C2000
Yes
-
Yes
-
-
-
-
C200H Device Group
Device
Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU01
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
CPU02
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
CPU03
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
CPU21
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
CPU21
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
CPU22
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
CPU23
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
CPU11
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
CPU31
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
C200HE Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
CPU11
-
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
CPU32
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CPU42
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
C200HE-Z Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU11
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
CPU32
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CPU42
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
C200HG Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU33
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CPU43
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CPU53
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CPU63
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 126
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX A – Network Availability
OMRON
C200HG-Z Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU33
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CPU43
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CPU53
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CPU63
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
C200HS Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU01
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
CPU03
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
CPU11
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
CPU13
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
C200HX Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
CPU34
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CPU44
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CPU54
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CPU64
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
C200HX-Z Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU34
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CPU44
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CPU54
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CPU64
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
C500 Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
C500
Yes
-
Yes
-
-
-
-
C250
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
C120
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
C50
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
-
CJ1G Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU45
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
CPU44
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 127
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX A – Network Availability
OMRON
CJ1G-H Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU45
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
CPU44
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
CPU43
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
CPU42
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
CJ1H-H Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU66
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CPU65
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CJ1M Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU12
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
CPU13
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
CPU22
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
CPU23
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
NSJ Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
G5D
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
CPM1 (CPM1A/CPM2*) Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU10
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
CPU20
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
CPU30
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
CPM2*-S* Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
N/A
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
Yes
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 128
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX A – Network Availability
OMRON
CQM1 Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU11
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
CPU21
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
CPU41
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
CPU42
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
CPU43
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
CPU44
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
CQM1H Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU11
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
CPU21
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
CPU51
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
-
-
CPU61
Yes
Yes
-
-
Yes
-
-
CS1G/CS1G-H Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU45
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CPU44
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CPU43
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CPU42
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CS1H/CS1H-H Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU67
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CPU66
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CPU65
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CPU64
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
CPU63
Yes
Yes
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
IDSC Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
C01
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
C02
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 129
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX A – Network Availability
OMRON
SRM1 – SRM1 V2 Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
C01
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
C02
Yes
Yes
-
-
-
-
-
CV1000 Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU01
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CV2000 Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU01
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CV500 Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU01
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CVM1 Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU01
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CPU11
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CVM1-V2 Device Group
Device Type
SYSMAC
WAY
Toolbus
SYSMAC
NET
SYSMAC
LINK
Controller
Link
Ethernet
Device
Net
CPU01
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CPU11
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CPU21
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 130
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
APPENDIX B
PLC Memory Areas
The following tables provide memory area details for each device group.
Some tables indicate special addresses. These can be as follows:
♦
CLOCK. This allows reading/writing of a PLC's real-time clock.
♦
BANKNO. This allows reading/writing of a PLC's extended memory bank number.
♦
MODE. This allows reading/writing of a PLC's run-mode.
C**H Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
AR
0
27
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
TC
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
DM
0
1999
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
99
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
253
255 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
No
LR
0
63
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
247
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
253
255 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
No
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
Special addresses CLOCK, MODE.
C**K Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
TC
0
47
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
DM
0
63
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
9
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
FC
IR (opt)
0
18 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
Yes
SR (opt)
18 (bit 8)
19 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
Read
Write
Modifiers
FC
C**P Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
TC
0
47
Present Value
Status
Yes
DM
0
63
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
9
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
18 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
18 (bit 8)
19 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 131
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
C1000H Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
AR
0
27
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
TC
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
DM
0
4095
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
99
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
236
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
LR
0
63
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
FC
SR (opt)
237
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
SR (opt)
253
255 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
No
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
Special addresses: MODE.
C20 Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
TC
0
47
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
HR
0
9
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
18 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
18 (bit 8)
19 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
C2000H Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
AR
0
27
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
TC
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
DM
0
6655
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
99
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
236
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
LR
0
63
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
237
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
253
255 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
No
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
FC
Special addresses: MODE.
C200H Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
AR
0
27
Yes
Yes
Yes
DM
0
1999
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
99
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
235
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
LR
0
63
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
236
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 132
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
SR (opt)
253
255 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
No
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
TC
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
Modifiers
FC
Special addresses: CLOCK, MODE.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 133
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
C200HE Device Group
General Memory Areas
Memory Areas for any CPU.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
AR
0
27
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
DM
0
4095
Yes
No
Yes
DM
6000
6655
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
99
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
235
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
300
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
LR
0
63
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
FC
SR (opt)
236
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
SR (opt)
253
255 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
No
SR (opt)
256
299
Yes
Yes
Yes
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
SR (opt)
256
299
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
TC
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
Modifiers
FC
CPU 32/42 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to general memory areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
DM
4096
5999
Yes
No
Yes
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
FC
Special addresses: CLOCK, MODE.
C200HE-Z Device Group
General Memory Areas
Memory Areas for any CPU.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
AR
0
27
Yes
Yes
Yes
DM
0
4095
Yes
No
Yes
DM
6000
6655
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
99
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
235
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
300
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
LR
0
63
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
236
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
253
255 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
No
SR (opt)
256
299
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
SR (opt)
256
299
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
TC
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 134
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
CPU 32/42 Device Group
Memory Areas in addition to general memory areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
DM
4096
5999
Yes
No
Yes
Modifiers
Special addresses: CLOCK, MODE.
C200HG Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
AR
0
27
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
DM
0
6655
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
99
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
235
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
300
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
LR
0
63
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
236
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
253
255 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
No
SR (opt)
256
299
Yes
Yes
Yes
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
TC
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
EM
0
6143 * 1
Yes
No
Yes
-n
FC
Special addresses: CLOCK, MODE, BANKNO.
C200HG-Z Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
AR
0
27
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
DM
0
6655
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
99
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
235
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
300
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
LR
0
63
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
236
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
253
255 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
No
SR (opt)
256
299
Yes
Yes
Yes
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
TC
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
EM
0
6143 * 1
Yes
No
Yes
-n
FC
Special addresses: CLOCK, MODE, BANKNO.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 135
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
C200HS Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
AR
0
DM
0
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
27
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
6655
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
99
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
235
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
300
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
LR
0
63
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
FC
SR (opt)
236
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
SR (opt)
253
255 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
No
SR (opt)
256
299
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
TC
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
Special addresses: CLOCK, MODE.
C200HX Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
AR
0
27
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
DM
0
6655
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
99
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
235
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
300
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
LR
0
63
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
236
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
253
255 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
No
SR (opt)
256
299
Yes
Yes
Yes
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
TC
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
EM
0
6143 * 3
Yes
No
Yes
-n
FC
Special addresses: CLOCK, MODE, BANKNO.
C200HX-Z Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
AR
0
27
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
DM
0
6655
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
99
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
235
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
300
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
LR
0
63
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
236
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
253
255 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
No
SR (opt)
256
299
Yes
Yes
Yes
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
TC
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 136
FC
FC
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
EM
0
6143 * 3
Yes
No
Yes
-n
CPU 65 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to general memory areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
EM
0
6143 * 8
Yes
No
Yes
-n
CPU 85 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to general memory areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
EM
0
6143 * 16
Yes
No
Yes
-n
Special addresses: CLOCK, MODE, BANKNO.
C500 Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
TC
0
127
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
DM
0
511
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
31
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
57
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
LR
0
31
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
FC
SR (opt)
58
60
Yes
Yes
Yes
SR (opt)
61
63 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
No
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
CJ1G Device Group
General Memory Areas
General Memory Areas for all CPUs 44 and 45.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
IR
0
15
Yes (double)
No
Yes
DR
0
15
Yes
No
Yes
TK
0
31
Status
Yes
No
A
0
447
Yes
Yes
No
A
448
959
Yes
Yes
Yes
H
0
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
W
0
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
Modifiers
fc
fc
CIO(opt)
0
6143
Yes
Yes
Yes
fc
T
0
4095
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
C
0
4095
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 137
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
D
0
32767
Yes
No
Yes
CF
0
11
No
Yes
No
CF
100
104
No
Yes
No
CF
113
114
No
Yes
No
Modifiers
CPU 44 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767 * 1
Yes
No
Yes
-n
CPU 45 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767 * 3
Yes
No
Yes
-n
Modifiers
Special addresses:
(all CPUs):
(CPU 44/45):
CLOCK, MODE.
BANKNO.
CJ1G-H Device Group
General Memory Areas
General Memory Areas for all CPUs 42, 43, 44 and 45.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
IR
0
15
Yes (double)
No
Yes
DR
0
15
Yes
No
Yes
TK
0
31
Status
Yes
No
A
0
447
Yes
Yes
No
A
448
959
Yes
Yes
Yes
H
0
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
W
0
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
fc
fc
CIO(opt)
0
6143
Yes
Yes
Yes
fc
T
0
4095
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
FC
C
0
4095
Present Value
Status
Yes
D
0
32767
Yes
No
Yes
CF
0
11
No
Yes
No
CF
100
104
No
Yes
No
CF
113
114
No
Yes
No
CPU 42 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767 * 1
Yes
No
Yes
-n
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 138
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
CPU 43 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767 * 1
Yes
No
Yes
-n
CPU 44 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767 * 1
Yes
No
Yes
-n
CPU 45 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767 * 3
Yes
No
Yes
-n
Special addresses:
(all CPUs):
(CPU 44/45):
CLOCK, MODE.
BANKNO.
CJ1H-H Device Group
General Memory Areas
General Memory Areas for CPUs 65 and 66.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
CIO(opt)
0
6143
Yes
Yes
Yes
fc
fc
DR
0
15
Yes
No
Yes
TK
0
31
Status
Yes
No
A
0
447
Yes
Yes
No
A
448
959
Yes
Yes
Yes
fc
fc
H
0
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
W
0
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
T
0
4095
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
C
0
4095
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
D
0
32767
Yes
No
Yes
IR
0
15
Yes (double)
No
Yes
CF
0
11
No
Yes
No
CF
100
104
No
Yes
No
CF
113
114
No
Yes
No
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 139
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
CPU 65 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767*3
Yes
No
Yes
-n
CPU 66 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767*7
Yes
No
Yes
-n
Modifiers
CJ1M and CP1H Device Group
General Memory Areas
General Memory Areas for all CPUs 12, 13, 22 and 23.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
IR
0
15
Yes (double)
No
Yes
DR
0
15
Yes
No
Yes
TK
0
31
Status
Yes
No
A
0
447
Yes
Yes
No
A
448
959
Yes
Yes
Yes
fc
fc
H
0
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
W
0
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
CIO(opt)
0
6143
Yes
Yes
Yes
T
0
4095
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
C
0
4095
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
D
0
32767
Yes
No
Yes
CF
0
11
No
Yes
No
CF
100
104
No
Yes
No
CF
113
114
No
Yes
No
fc
CPM1 (CPM1A) Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
AR
0
15
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
DM
0
1023
Yes
No
Yes
DM
6144
6655
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
19
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
19
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
200
231
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
LR
0
15
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
232
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
TC
0
127
Present Value
Status
Yes
Special addresses: MODE.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 140
FC
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
CPM2*/CPM2*-S* Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
FC
AR
0
23
Yes
Yes
Yes
DM
0
2047
Yes
No
Yes
DM
6144
6599
Yes
No
Yes
DM
6600
6655
Yes
No
No
HR
0
19
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
49
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
200
227
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
LR
0
15
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
FC
SR (opt)
228
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
SR(opt)
253
255
Yes
Yes
No
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
TC
0
127
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
Special addresses: MODE.
CQM1 Device Group
Memory Areas
Memory Areas for all CPUs.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
AR
0
27
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
DM
0
1023
Yes
No
Yes
DM
6144
6655
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
99
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
243
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
LR
0
63
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
FC
SR (opt)
244
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
SR (opt)
253
255 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
No
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
TC
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
Modifiers
CPU 41/42/43/44/45 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to general memory areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
DM
1024
6143
Yes
No
Yes
Special addresses: CLOCK, MODE.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 141
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
CQM1H Device Group
Memory Areas
Memory Areas for all CPUs.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
AR
0
27
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
HR
0
99
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
243
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
LR
0
63
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
244
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
253
255 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
No
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
TC
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
CPU 11/21 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to general memory areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
DM
0
3071
Yes
No
Yes
DM
6144
6655
Yes
No
Yes
Special addresses: CLOCK, MODE.
CPU 51 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to general memory areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
DM
0
6655
Yes
No
Yes
Modifiers
Special addresses: CLOCK, MODE.
CPU 61 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to general memory areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
DM
0
6655
Yes
No
Yes
EM
0
6143 * 1
Yes
No
Yes
Modifiers
Special addresses: CLOCK, MODE.
CS1G Device Group
General Memory Areas
General Memory Areas for all CPUs 42, 43, 44 and 45.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
IR
0
15
Yes (double)
No
Yes
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 142
Modifiers
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
DR
0
15
Yes
No
Yes
fc
TK
0
31
Status
Yes
No
A
0
447
Yes
Yes
No
A
448
959
Yes
Yes
Yes
H
0
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
fc
W
0
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
CIO(opt)
0
6143
Yes
Yes
Yes
T
0
4095
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
C
0
4095
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
D
0
32767
Yes
No
Yes
CF
0
11
No
Yes
No
CF
100
104
No
Yes
No
CF
113
114
No
Yes
No
fc
CPU 44 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767 * 1
Yes
No
Yes
-n
CPU 45 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767 * 3
Yes
No
Yes
-n
Special addresses:
(all CPUs):
(CPU 44/45):
CLOCK, MODE.
BANKNO.
CS1G-H Device Group
General Memory Areas
General Memory Areas for all CPU 42, 42, 44 and 45
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
CIO(opt)
0
6143
Yes
Yes
Yes
fc
fc
DR
0
15
Yes
No
Yes
TK
0
31
Status
Yes
No
A
0
447
Yes
Yes
No
A
448
959
Yes
Yes
Yes
f
FC
H
0
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
W
0
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
T
0
4095
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
C
0
4095
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
D
0
32767
Yes
No
Yes
IR
0
15
Yes (double)
No
Yes
CF
0
11
No
Yes
No
CF
100
104
No
Yes
No
CF
113
114
No
Yes
No
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 143
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
CPU 42 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767*1
Yes
No
Yes
-n
CPU 43 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767*1
Yes
No
Yes
-n
CPU 44 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767*1
Yes
No
Yes
-n
CPU 45 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767*3
Yes
No
Yes
-n
Modifiers
CS1H Device Group
General Memory Areas
General Memory Areas for all CPUs 63, 64, 65, 66 and 67.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
IR
0
15
Yes (double)
No
Yes
DR
0
15
Yes
No
Yes
TK
0
31
Status
Yes
No
A
0
447
Yes
Yes
No
A
448
959
Yes
Yes
Yes
H
0
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
W
0
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
fc
fc
CIO(opt)
0
6143
Yes
Yes
Yes
fc
T
0
4095
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
FC
C
0
4095
Present Value
Status
Yes
D
0
32767
Yes
No
Yes
CF
0
11
No
Yes
No
CF
100
104
No
Yes
No
CF
113
114
No
Yes
No
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 144
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
CPU 64 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767 * 1
Yes
No
Yes
-n
CPU 65 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767 * 3
Yes
No
Yes
-n
CPU 66 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767 * 7
Yes
No
Yes
-n
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
Yes
No
Yes
-n
CPU 67 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
E
0
32765 * 13
Special
addresses:
(all CPUs):
(CPU 64/65/66/67):
CLOCK, MODE.
BANKNO.
CS1H-H Device Group
General Memory Areas
General Memory Areas for all CPU 63, 64, 65, 66 and 67
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
CIO(opt)
0
6143
Yes
Yes
Yes
fc
DR
0
15
Yes
No
Yes
fc
TK
0
31
Status
Yes
No
A
0
447
Yes
Yes
No
A
448
959
Yes
Yes
Yes
fc
H
0
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
fc
W
0
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
T
0
4095
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
FC
C
0
4095
Present Value
Status
Yes
D
0
32767
Yes
No
Yes
IR
0
15
Yes (double)
No
Yes
CF
0
11
No
Yes
No
CF
100
104
No
Yes
No
CF
113
114
No
Yes
No
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 145
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
CPU 63 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767*1
Yes
No
Yes
-n
CPU 64 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767*1
Yes
No
Yes
-n
CPU 65 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767*3
Yes
No
Yes
-n
CPU 66 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767*7
Yes
No
Yes
-n
CPU 67 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
E
0
32767*13
Yes
No
Yes
-n
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
FC
IDSC Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
AR
0
27
Yes
Yes
Yes
DM
0
1023
Yes
No
Yes
DM
6144
6655
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
99
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
243
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
LR
0
63
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
FC
SR (opt)
244
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
SR (opt)
253
255 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
No
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
TC
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
Special addresses: CLOCK, MODE.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 146
FC
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
SRM1 Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
FC
AR
0
15
Yes
Yes
Yes
DM
0
2047
Yes
No
Yes
DM
6144
6655
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
19
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
0
23
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR (opt)
200
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
LR
0
15
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
232
252
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR (opt)
253
255 (bit 7)
Yes
Yes
No
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
TC
0
127
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
Special addresses: MODE.
SRM1 V2 Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
AR
0
15
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
FC
C
0
127
Yes
Yes
Yes
DM
0
2047
Yes
No
Yes
DM
6144
6655
Yes
No
Yes
HR
0
19
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR
0
23
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR
200
239
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
LR
0
15
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR
240
253
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
SR
253
254
Yes
Yes
No
SR
254
255
Yes
Yes
No
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
No
TC
0
127
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
FC
Special addresses: MODE.
CV1000 Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
A
0
255
Yes
Yes
Yes
A
256
511
Yes
Yes
No
AC
0
2047
No
Yes
No
C
0
1023
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
CIO (opt)
0
2555
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
D
0
24575
Yes
No
Yes
DR
0
2
Yes
No
Yes
G
0
255
Yes
Yes
Yes
IR
0
2
Yes
No
Yes
ST
0
1023
Yes
Yes
Yes
T
0
1023
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
FC
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 147
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
TN
0
TR
0
1023
No
Yes
Yes
FC
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
Yes
E
0
32765 * 2/4/8
FC
Yes
No
Yes
-n
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
FC
Special addresses: BANKNO, CLOCK, MODE.
CV2000 Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
A
0
255
Yes
Yes
Yes
A
256
511
Yes
Yes
No
AC
0
2047
No
Yes
No
C
0
1023
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
CIO (opt)
0
2555
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
D
0
24575
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
DR
0
2
Yes
No
G
0
255
Yes
Yes
Yes
IR
0
2
Yes
No
Yes
ST
0
1023
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
T
0
1023
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
TN
0
1023
No
Yes
Yes
FC
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
Yes
FC
E
0
32765 * 2/4/8
Yes
No
Yes
-n
Special addresses: BANKNO, CLOCK, MODE.
CV500 Device Group
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
A
0
255
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
A
256
511
Yes
Yes
No
AC
0
1023
No
Yes
No
C
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
CIO (opt)
0
2555
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
D
0
8191
Yes
No
Yes
DR
0
2
Yes
No
Yes
G
0
255
Yes
Yes
Yes
IR
0
2
Yes
No
Yes
FC
ST
0
511
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
T
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
TN
0
511
No
Yes
Yes
FC
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
Yes
FC
Special addresses: MODE, CLOCK
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 148
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
CVM1 Device Group
General Memory Areas
Memory Areas for any CPU.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
A
0
255
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
A
256
511
Yes
Yes
No
DR
0
2
Yes
No
Yes
CIO (opt)
0
2555
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
G
0
255
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
IR
0
2
Yes
No
Yes
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
Yes
FC
CPU 01 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
C
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
D
0
8191
Yes
No
Yes
T
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
CPU 11 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
C
0
1023
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
D
0
24575
Yes
No
Yes
T
0
1023
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
FC
Special addresses: (all CPUs): CLOCK, MODE.
CVM1-V2 Device Group
General Memory Areas
Memory Areas for any CPU.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
A
0
255
Yes
Yes
Yes
A
256
511
Yes
Yes
No
DR
0
2
Yes
No
Yes
CIO (opt)
0
2555
Yes
Yes
Yes
FC
FC
G
0
255
Yes
Yes
Yes
IR
0
2
Yes
No
Yes
TR
0
0 (bit 7)
No
Yes
Yes
FC
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 149
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX B – PLC Memory Areas
OMRON
CPU 01 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
FC
C
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
D
0
8191
Yes
No
Yes
T
0
511
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
Read
Write
Modifiers
FC
CPU 11 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
C
0
1023
Present Value
Status
Yes
D
0
24575
Yes
No
Yes
T
0
1023
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
CPU 21 Memory Areas
Memory Areas in addition to General Memory Areas.
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
C
0
1023
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
D
0
24575
Yes
No
Yes
T
0
1023
Present Value
Status
Yes
FC
E
0
32765 * 2/4/8
Yes
No
Yes
-n
Special
addresses:
(all CPUs):
(CPU 21):
CLOCK,
MODE.
BANKNO.
Word
Addressing
Bit
Addressing
Read
Write
Modifiers
FinsGateway CPU Unit
Prefix
Start
Channel
End Channel
CIO(opt)
0
32767
Yes
Yes
Yes
D
0
32767
Yes
No
Yes
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 150
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX C – Toolbars and Keyboard Shortcuts
OMRON
APPENDIX C
Toolbars and Keyboard Shortcuts
The following tables summarise the toolbars and keyboard shortcuts available from each component and tool. The
F1 function key is common across all components and tools and provides context help.
Toolbars
Open
Binary
Open File
Binary Coded Decimal
Save in Project
Decimal
Signed Decimal
Print
Print Preview
Floating Point
Hexadecimal
Cut
Text
Copy
LReal
Past
Double Word
Quad Word
Resize Column
Zoom Out
Fill Data Area
Clear Data Area
Restore Zoom
Zoom In
Transfer to PLC
Transfer from PLC
Compare with PLC
Monitor
Set Value
Force On
Force Off
Clear Force Statusl
Keyboard Shortcuts
Ctrl+O……….
Ctrl+S……….
Ctrl+P……….
Ctrl+X……….
Ctrl+C……….
Ctrl+V……….
Ctrl+PgUp…..
Ctrl+PgDn…..
Open
Save in Project
Print
Cut
Copy
Paste
Zoom In
Zoom Out
Alt+B………
Alt+C………
Alt+D………
Alt+S………
Alt+O………
Alt+Q………
Alt+P………
Alt+H………
Alt+T………
Alt+L………
Binary
Binary Coded Decimal
Decimal
Signed Decimal
Double Word
Quad Word
Floating Point
Hexadecimal
Text
Real
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 151
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX C – Toolbars and Keyboard Shortcuts
OMRON
Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor Component
Toolbars
Keyboard Shortcuts
Ctrl+O............. Open
Open
Ctrl+PgUp....... Zoom In
Save
Ctrl+PgDn....... Zoom Out
Configure Trace/Time Chart
Zoom Out
Restore Zoom
Zoom In
Scale Out
Restore Scale
Scale In
Stop Trace/Time Chart
Trigger the Trace/Time Chart
Execute Trace/Time Chart
Read Trace/Time Chart
About
Help
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 152
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX C – Toolbars and Keyboard Shortcuts
OMRON
Memory Card Component
Toolbars
Keyboard Shortcuts
Ctrl+X ............. Cut
Cut
Ctrl+C ............. Copy
Copy
Ctrl+V ............. Paste
Paste
Ctrl+A ............. Select All
F5 ................... Refresh device
Delete
Rename
Properties
Large Icons
Small Icons
List
Details
CX-Net Network Configuration Tool
Toolbars
Keyboard Shortcuts
Ctrl+N ............. New
Open Project
Ctrl+O............. Open
Edit Project
Ctrl+S ............. Save
Open/Close Project Device PLC
Return ............ Edit Item
Display PLC Information
Insert .............. Insert Item
Delete............. Delete Item
Set PLC Operating Mode
Display PLC Error Status
Show Unit Status
Configure PLC System Settings
Configure IO Table
Configure C-Series Comms. Units
Online Edit Routing Table
Online Edit Data Link
Echo Back Test
Broadcast Test
Ping Test
About
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 153
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX C – Toolbars and Keyboard Shortcuts
OMRON
Import/Export Tool
Toolbars
Keyboard shortcuts
New
Open
Edit Project
Import CVSS
Import LSS
Import Text
Import Tagged Database
Export Text
Export to FinsServer TagDB
Clear Screen
Print Screen
About
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 154
Ctrl+N ............. New
Ctrl+O............. Open
Ctrl+E ............. Edit Project
Ctrl+C ............. Import CVSS
Ctrl+L ............. Import LSS
Ctrl+T ............. Import Text
Ctrl+V ............. Import from FinsGateway
Alt+T............... Export Text
Alt+V .............. Export to FinsGateway TagDB
Ctrl+R ............. Clear screen
Ctrl+P ............. Print screen
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX C – Toolbars and Keyboard Shortcuts
OMRON
Data Link Editor
Toolbars
Keyboard Shortcuts
Ctrl+N ............. New
New
Ctrl+O............. Open
Show All Network Nodes
Ctrl+S ............. Save
Open
Ctrl+P ............. Print
Save
Ctrl+<space.... Change Window
Toggle Network/Single Node operation
Transfer to PLC
Transfer from PLC
Delete
Verify Node
Status
Automatic Datalink Setup
Validate Table
Wizard
Add source link
Add Destination
Set properties
Delete link destination service area
Zoom in
Zoom out
Zoom original
Print
About Datalink Component
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 155
CX-Server PLC Tools
APPENDIX C – Toolbars and Keyboard Shortcuts
OMRON
Routing Table Editor
Toolbars
Keyboard Shortcuts
Ctrl+P............. Print
New
Open
Save
Print
Print Preview
Always on top
Transfer to PLC
Transfer from PLC
Check routing table
Activate C-Series Control Link
routing Table
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 156
CX-Server PLC Tools
GLOSSARY OF TERMS – CX-Server – PLC Tools User manual
OMRON
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
Actual IO Table
The real hardware configuration of the PLC units and slots on power-up.
Address
A location in memory where data or programs are stored. It can also identify a location
of a node on a network.
Application
A software program that accomplishes a specific task. Examples of applications are
CX-Server, CX-Programmer, CX-Protocol and Microsoft Excel.
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange.
Auxiliary Area
An area of PLC memory which normally contains transmission Counters, flags and
control bits. It also retains the status of the device during power failure.
Baud rate
The speed of data transmission in terms of the number of bits per second that are being
sent.
BCD
Binary Coded Decimal.
Binary Coded Decimal
A data format supported by CX-Server.
Binary
A data format supported by CX-Server. A number system format to the base 2, i.e.
employing the digits 0 and 1.
Bit
A digit used in binary notation which can take the value 0 or 1. The value of a bit, or
combination of bits, can represent the status of a device or can be used in programming.
Boolean
A type of point or symbol where the value can be one of two states. Essentially the two
states are ‘0’ and ‘1’, but these states can be assigned a meaningful designation.
Bridge
A device connecting local area networks of similar architectures together.
Broadcast address
An address held in common by all nodes on a network to which the same data is
transmitted simultaneously.
Bus
A communications path along which data can be transmitted or received between the
units connected to it.
Central Processing Unit
The part of the PLC which can store programs and data, execute the instructions in
program, and process input and output signals in order to communicate with other,
external, devices.
Clipboard
An area within the windows environment where data can be stored temporarily or
transferred between applications.
Command modifier
An optional part of an address string indicating the modification to be performed on the
data at that address (within PLC memory) when it is accessed.
Common link parameter
The common words used by all PLCs in a Data Link (within a SYSMAC LINK system).
Compact Flash
A type of memory card fitted to a PLC.
Components
CX-Server is made up of six components accessible from an invoking application.
Control bit
A bit assigned a controlling role in the functioning of a device; its status is set via a
program to achieve this function.
Controller Link
A network that can send and receive large data packets flexibly and easily among the
OMRON PLCs.
Counter area
An area of PLC memory containing program counters and their related completion
flags.
Counter
An area of memory reserved for the purposes of counting the number of times an event
has occurred.
CPU bus link area
An area of PLC memory allocated to the CPU bus unit.
CPU type
The type of CPU available to a specific device, the amount of memory available to a
PLC varies according to the CPU involved.
CPU
Central Processing Unit.
CS-series
Indicates either a CS1G-H, CS1H-H, CS1D-S, or CS1D-H.
CJ-series
Indicates either a CJ1G-H, CJ1H-H, or CJ1M.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 157
CX-Server PLC Tools
GLOSSARY OF TERMS – CX-Server – PLC Tools User Manual
OMRON
C-Series
Indicates any one of the following types of PLC: C2000H, C200H, C200HE,
C200HE-Z, C200HG, C200HE-Z, C200HS, C200HX, C200HX-Z, C1000H, C**H,
C**K, C**P, CQM1, C500, C120, C20, CPM1 (CPM1A/CPM2*).
CV-Series
Indicates any one of the following types of PLC: CVM1, CVM1-V2, CV500, CV1000
or CV2000. When using SYSMAC NET, CV series PLCs can operate in either CV
mode (where the datagrams contain FINS commands) or C mode (where the datagrams
contain C SYSNET commands).
CVSS
A file format supported by the CX-Server Import tool. CVSS has several file types
which have different information contained in them.
CX-Net Network Configuration tool
This CX-Server tool consists of a suite of programs allowing the management of
Routing Tables and Data Link Tables in OMRON PLCs.
CX-Server
An advanced communications management system for OMRON PLCs providing
facilities for software to maintain PLC device and address information and to
communicate with OMRON PLCs and their supported network types.
CX-Server Project
A definition of an OMRON PLC network configuration. It identifies all devices and
networks within a particular configuration including the areas of PLC memory (points)
that can be read from or written to.
Cycle time
The time interval between read/write cycles at a network node.
Data area
An area of PLC memory allocated to the storage of data (not programs).
Data bits
Bits representing each character to be transmitted.
Data link
A software connection establishing common data areas between PLCs on a network
allowing data to be between these devices.
Data Link Editor
The data Link Editor allows a PLC to be configured so that it can participate in one, or
more automatic data sharing schemes, over Sysmac Link and Controller Link networks,
without the need for special programming.
Data link table
A table of the common data memory areas used by the PLCs in a Data Link.
Data location
An area of memory identified by an address.
Data memory
An area of PLC memory holding only word data.
Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor component
This CX-Server component displays data obtained from the PLC’s memory areas during
program execution.
Datagram
A packet of information which can be transmitted across a network containing routing
information plus data.
DDE
Dynamic Data Exchange. A channel through which correctly prepared programs can
actively exchange data and control other applications within Microsoft Windows.
CX-Server, through the use of the DDE Manager tool, allows extensive use of DDE
functionality.
See also Item, Server, server application and Topic.
DDE management library
A dynamic link library within Windows which allows dynamic data exchange to be
employed.
DDE Manager tool
A CX-Server tool for transferring data between PLCs and a client application using
DDE, for example Microsoft Excel.
DDEML
Dynamic Data Exchange Management Library.
Debug mode
A mode of PLC operation during which any errors arising from the currently active
program will be flagged. For CV-series PLC only.
Decimal
A data format supported by CX-Server.
Default
A value automatically set by a program in the absence of user input or on initial entry to
an application; such values can be overwritten.
Destination network address
The address of the network to which data is directed.
Destination node number
The number identifying the destination node.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 158
OMRON
CX-Server PLC Tools
GLOSSARY OF TERMS – CX-Server – PLC Tools User Manual
Destination node
The node (and therefore device) where transmitted data is to be placed.
Device group
A class of devices which share similar properties, each group can be sub-divided into
device types.
Device type
A type of OMRON PLC.
Device
A type of OMRON automation device, either a PLC, Temperature Controller, Memory
Card Writer or PROM Writer.
Dialog
A window asking for some form of response from the user, usually in the form of either
entering requested information, selecting displayed data, or confirming an operation.
DLL
Dynamic Link Library. A program file that although cannot be run stand-alone as an
executable, can be utilised by one or more applications or programs as a common
service. DLL files have a *.DLL extension. DLL’s comprise a number of stand-alone
functions.
Double Floating Point
Double Floating Point (LREAL) type is as the IEEE754 Double precision (1.7E
+308/-307) as defined by Microsoft®.
Download
Refer to Transfer to PLC.
Drag
The act of moving an item on the screen by selecting it with the mouse, and keeping the
mouse button depressed, moving the mouse until the item has reached the required
location. The mouse button is then released.
Driver
The software which controls the communications between a computer and PLC,
translating any information passed between them into a format that the receiving Device
can understand.
Dynamic Data Exchange
The method of transferring data (and possibly instructions) between applications via the
establishment of reference links between them.
Echo test
The reflection of a signal along a communications channel in order to check the
accuracy of data transmission by comparing the received data against the original data at
the sending end.
EEPROM
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory.
Elements
The number of address units which start at a specified data location.
End Connection
The final communication link between computer and PLC, or in the case of a Network
configuration, gateway PLC to PLC.
End network address
The address of the destination network to which communications are directed.
Error status
An indication of an error condition found in a system.
Ethernet
A 10 MB baseband local area network with each Device attached to the network having
equal status and therefore the ability to transmit as, and when, required (provided the
line isn’t busy).
Even parity
The number of 1s in a data transmission is even.
Event frame
A structure, predetermined by a protocol, containing specific fields for the transmission
of data.
Exclusive mode
PLC mode which allows an application exclusive access to the Device.
Expansion memory
The memory available to a CPU in addition to conventional memory.
File memory
An area of CPU memory allocated to the storage of data.
File Transfer Protocol
Protocol for transferring files between host computers.
FINS
Factory Intelligent Network Service.
FinsGateway
An OMRON communication type supported by CX-Server.
Flag
An indicator representing the condition of a process, data area or Device.
Floating Point
A data format supported by CX-Server.
Folder
A structure which organises the files in computer memory or on disk. Also known as a
‘directory’.
Frame length
The waiting time before data is transmitted across the network
FTP
File Protocol Transfer.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 159
CX-Server PLC Tools
GLOSSARY OF TERMS – CX-Server – PLC Tools User Manual
OMRON
Gateway device
A Device connecting two networks of different architectures together.
Gateway network address
The address of a network acting as a gateway.
Gateway PLC
A PLC which acts as a link to another network.
Group
A sub-directory within a CX-Server project hierarchy which contains points and/or
further (subsidiary) groups.
GUI
Graphical User Interface. Part of a program that interacts with the user and takes full
advantage of the graphics displays of computers. A GUI employs pull-down menus and
dialog boxes for ease of use. Like all Microsoft Windows based applications,
CX-Server has a GUI for each component and tool.
Hard disk
A disk permanently mounted on its drive.
Hexadecimal
A data format supported by CX-Server.
Hierarchy
The structure of a CX-Server project from the root directory down through any
sub-directories (groups) to individual points contained within those groups.
High Link
A network driver.
Host computer
A computer responsible for data management and for overall control of the system.
Programs and data are downloaded to a PLC from the host computer.
Host link system
A system comprising one or more host computers connected to one or more PLCs by
host link units; these units facilitate the transfer of data between the PLC(s) and the host
computer.
Host link unit
The interface between a PLC and a host computer.
Icon
Pictorial representations of computer resources and functions. Many icons are used by
CX-Server components and tools as part of the GUI.
IDSC device type
An OMRON PLC device supported by CX-Server.
Import tool
This CX-Server tool is used for addresses and PLCs defined using the CVSS and LSS
products.
Input bit data area
An area of PLC memory containing the status of an input Device.
Input bit
The location within memory indicating the status of an input.
Input device
A Device which sends signals to a PLC.
Input
The signal sent to a PLC from an external device.
Instruction
A statement indicating an operation to be performed and identifies any data involved in
this operation.
Intel Hex
A PLC device also known as a PROM Writer.
Interface
Hardware or software employed to link the elements within a system, including
networks, programs and computers.
Internal data type
The format of the data held at an address in PLC memory; for example, bit or signed
character binary.
Internode test
An echo test performed to check the condition of a PLC on a network node.
Invoking application
An application such as CX-Programmer and CX-Protocol that utilises components and
tools belonging to CX-Server.
IO bit
A bit which can hold data entered into, or received from, the system.
IO Table component
This CX-Server component retrieves configured PLCs rack and address data.
IO type
Input /Output type. An attribute of a point or symbol that defines the origin and
destination of the data for that point or symbol. The data can originate (be input from)
and is destined (is output to) to the internal computer memory, PLC or DDE target
application.
IO
Input /Output.
IP address table
A table containing the IP addresses for all the devices on the Ethernet.
IP address
An address for a device on the Ethernet.
IP router table
A table containing the addresses for each interface on a network.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 160
CX-Server PLC Tools
GLOSSARY OF TERMS – CX-Server – PLC Tools User Manual
OMRON
IP
Internet Protocol.
Item
A unique name for a data item within a topic.
LAN
Local Area Network.
Link Relay Area
A common data area allowing the transfer of data between PLCs connected by a Data
Link; the information held in this area in the memory of each PLC is identical.
Link system
A system that links PLCs together.
Link unit
A unit which connects a device to the network.
Link
A connection between two units established either by software or a hardware device.
Load
Placing a program or data into an area of computer or PLC memory.
Local area network
A network located within a limited area (normally the user’s premises).
Local network address
The address of the network to which a PLC is connected.
Local network number
The number of the unit connecting the PLC to the network.
Local table
A table containing the details of the networks to which a PLC belongs.
LREAL
LREAL (Double Floating Point) type is as the IEEE754 Double precision (1.7E
+308/-307) as defined by Microsoft®.
LSS
A file format supported by the CX-Server Import tool.
Mailbox
A communications protocol.
Mark parity
The parity bit is always set to 1.
Master
A controlling device which sends data and/or instructions to a slave device.
Mb
Megabytes – A means of defining computer memory size.
Memory area
Addressable area of storage space in a device.
Memory Card component
This CX-Server component manages the file storage to and from PLC memory cards.
Memory Card Writer
A device which writes data to a memory card.
Memory card
A data storage medium which can hold both programs and data.
MHz
Megahertz.
Micro host link
A link to a ‘micro’ device acting as a host.
Microsoft Excel
A spreadsheet application.
Microsoft Windows Explorer
A file handling application part of the Microsoft Windows suite.
Microsoft Windows
A windowing environment that is noted for its GUI, and for features such as multiple
typefaces, desk accessories (such as a clock, calculator, calendar and notepad), and the
capability of moving text and graphics from one application to another via a clipboard.
CX-Server runs only under Microsoft Windows. DDE functions communicating with
other applications supported by CX-Server use Microsoft Windows as a basis.
Modem
A device with the ability to convert digital data from a computer into analogue form and
transmit it over a telecommunications line and also to convert received analogue signals
into digital form.
Monitor mode
A PLC operational mode which allows the device, during normal execution, to review
the condition of the Data Link (including the PLCs/nodes on that link).
n
A variable number.
Native data format
The format in which data is handled by a communications protocol; for example, ASCII
or binary.
Network bridge
A unit that connects two or more networks together.
Network parameters
Network settings including information such as the maximum number of nodes
permitted on a network and the waiting times between transmissions.
Network Service Board
An interface which connects devices (not PLCs) to the network.
Network
1. Part of the PLC configuration, based on the device type. The number of Networks
available is dependant on the device type.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 161
CX-Server PLC Tools
GLOSSARY OF TERMS – CX-Server – PLC Tools User Manual
OMRON
2. A number of computers linked together with a central processing point known as a
Server which is accessible to all computers. Networks affect CX-Server in that
further Network associated options are available if the computer is Network
connected.
Node number
Number identifying the device located at a particular node on the network. The number
can be between 1 and 126, the maximum number of nodes available on an OMRON
network.
Node
A position at which a device can be located on the network, consisting of a link unit
mounted to a device or PLC which in turn interfaces with a peripheral device or a
computer.
NSB
Network Service Board.
Odd parity
The number of 1s in a data transmission is odd.
Offline
The status of a device when it is not being controlled by a computer (although it may be
physically connected to it).
OLE
Object Linking and Embedding. Used to transfer and share information between
Microsoft Windows based applications and accessories.
Online
The status of a device when it is under the direct control of a computer.
Output Bit data area
An area of PLC memory reserved for output bits.
Output bit
The location within memory indicating the status of an output device.
Output device
A device which receives signals from a PLC.
Output
The signal sent from a PLC to an external device.
Packet
A unit of information transmitted across the network containing source and destination
address information together with the actual data.
Parity bit
A bit transmitted with a packet of data indicating the type of parity check to be
performed.
Parity
A type of validation check performed on transmitted information; data can be tested for
either even, odd, none, mark or space parity. The type of parity check involved is
indicated by the status of the parity bit.
Path
The location of a file including the drive, directory name plus any subdirectories and the
file name together with its associated extension.
Peripheral
A device which aids system operation rather than being central to its functioning.
Performance Monitor tool
A CX-Server tool for monitoring communications throughput and for displaying
CX-Server’s current performance level (i.e. a check to see if CX-Server is becoming
overloaded).
Ping test
A standard Ethenet communications test.
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller.
PLC Clock tool
The PLC Clock Tool provides a facility to monitor and set the PLC clock and
synchronise the PLC clock to the PC clock.
PLC Error component
This CX-Server component displays and manages PLC errors.
PLC Memory component
This CX-Server component allows the user to view, edit and monitor either channels
(words) or individual bits in areas of the PLC.
PLC Setup component
This CX-Server component permits the configuration of PLC settings.
Point
A point is used to hold a value of a predefined type - Boolean, Integer, Text, etc. The
contents of a point may be controlled by an object or I/O mechanism such as DDE. The
contents of a point may control the action or appearance of an object, or be used for
output via an I/O mechanism.
Polling
Interrogating a device to check its operational status or whether it is ready to send or
receive data.
Port
A device connection point allowing data entry and exit.
Program
A set of instructions which are performed by a computer or PLC.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 162
CX-Server PLC Tools
GLOSSARY OF TERMS – CX-Server – PLC Tools User Manual
OMRON
Program memory
An area of PLC memory reserved for the storage of programs.
Program mode
PLC mode of operation during which the device can be programmed.
Programmable Read Only Memory
An area of memory which can be updated with programs and data only once after
manufacture; once this area has been written to, it can only be read, not modified.
Project
OMRON configuration file inherited from the invoking application.
Refer also to CX-Server Project.
PROM writer
A device which writes the programs and data into PROM.
PROM
Programmable Read Only Memory.
Protocol
A set of rules governing the transmission of data.
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network.
Public Switched Telephone Network
A communications network carrying voice and data communications over switched
lines.
Rack
The apparatus to which a unit is fixed.
RAM
Random Access Memory.
Read mode
PLC mode which allows data from the PLC to be read but not modified.
Read/write mode
PLC mode which allows data to be read from and written to the device.
Refresh parameter table
A table identifying the words in a Data Link to be refreshed for an individual PLC.
Registered IO Table
The internal PLC table: this is the one used by the PLC when running, regardless of the
state of the actual hardware. It can be read and, for CV-series PLCs, written to by the
CX-Server software.
Relay network address
The end network address which a PLC communicates.
Relay node number
The number of the network node through which a transmission must pass to reach
another network.
Relay table
A table containing the relay network addresses, node numbers and end network
addresses used within a FINS system.
Remote network
A network beyond the LAN to which access must be gained through a gateway or
bridge.
Remote Terminals
Further units that can be supported by CX-Server via the Sysmac-Bus Master unit
Reset
Turning a bit or signal OFF or changing it to its set value or to zero.
Root
The highest level of a directory.
Root group
The highest level group in a CX-Server project.
Rotary switch
Indicates the method of calling a device by generating a series of pulses.
Routing table
A table containing the information necessary to allow communications between
different networks including local and gateway network address details.
Routing
The direction of data across a network from its source to its destination.
RS232
Industrial interface standard for serial communications.
RS422
Industrial interface standard for serial communications employing balanced line
circuits.
RTs
Remote Terminals.
Run Mode
PLC mode of operation during which device information is typically read-only.
Serial Connection
A direct connection between computer and PLC.
Server application
An application that can be used to view or interact with.
Refer also to DDE and OLE.
Server
1. Server is used in DDE functions to contain a link to an outside application. Using
DDE functions, CX-Server allows the manipulation of an outside application as
specified as the Server.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 163
CX-Server PLC Tools
GLOSSARY OF TERMS – CX-Server – PLC Tools User Manual
OMRON
Refer also to Server application.
2. A Server is the central processing point of a Network which is accessible to all
computers. Networks affect CX-Server in that further associated options are
available if the computer Network is connected.
Signed Decimal
A data format supported by CX-Server.
SIOU
Special Input /Output Unit.
Slave
A device which receives data or instructions from a master device.
Slots
Free areas within a rack to which units can be fixed.
Software switches
Areas of memory employed by an SIO unit used to set operating parameters (similar in
manner to a hardware switch).
Space parity
The parity bit is always set to 0.
Special Input /Output Unit
A unit designed for a specific purpose.
SRM1 device type
An OMRON PLC device supported by CX-Server.
Step Area
An area of PLC memory containing a flag indicating the status of steps used within a
program.
Stop bits
Bits indicating the end of transmission of each set of data bits; normally one or two bits,
they indicate the delay time between sending successive characters down the line.
Symbol
An address that has been given a name to make the address information more flexible.
Symbols are inherited by CX-Server by the invoking application.
SYSMAC LINK
OMRON high speed industrial network (either co-axial or fibre optic).
SYSMAC NET
OMRON high speed optical LAN which can be of type C SYSMAC NET or CV
SYSMAC NET.
SYSMAC WAY
OMRON network.
System area
An area of memory used for controlling and managing a unit.
System configuration
An arrangement of units, for example network, computers and PLCs.
Tagged database
A file format supported by the CX-Server Import tool. The Tagged database is also an
export format of the CX-Server Import tool.
TAPI
Telephony Application Programming Interface.
Target PLC
The PLC to which information or instructions are directed.
Taskbar
An integral part of Microsoft Windows which allows Microsoft Windows based
applications to be started. CX-Server tools are run from the Taskbar.
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.
Temperature Controller
An OMRON device.
Temporary Relay Area
An area of PLC memory containing instructions which can be loaded at a later point for
use with other instructions.
Text
1. A file format supported by the CX-Server Import tool. The Text is also an export
format of the CX-Server Import tool.
2. A data format supported by CX-Server.
Timer area
An area of PLC memory containing program timers and their related completion flags.
Toolbus
A network, either C-Toolbus or CV-Toolbus, allowing communications with a device
via the serial COM port of a personal computer (in a similar manner to SYSMAC
WAY). Data is transmitted along the network in binary format.
Tools
CX-Server is made up of four tools.
Topic
The name of an aspect of a service application which identifies where a reference link is
to be incorporated; for example, within Excel the topic would be the name of the
worksheet to be used.
Transceiver
A device which can receive and transmit data.
Transfer from PLC
The transfer of a program or data to a host (either a computer or a programming device)
from a lower-level (or slave) device.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 164
OMRON
CX-Server PLC Tools
GLOSSARY OF TERMS – CX-Server – PLC Tools User Manual
Transfer to PLC
The transfer of a program or data from a host (either a computer or a programming
device) to a lower-level (or slave) device.
Transition Area
Contains flags indicating when a transition is ON or OFF
Transmitter
A device which sends out signals.
UDP
User Datagram Protocol.
Unit number
A number identifying an individual component of an OMRON PLC system
configuration.
Units
A component of an OMRON PLC system configuration.
Unknown
The operating mode of a PLC that cannot be connected to.
Upload
See Transfer from PLC.
User Datagram Protocol
Protocol which directs information across a network to port numbers rather than to IP
addresses.
Word
A 16 bit unit of data memory.
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 165
INDEX
A
About CX-Server · 1, 4, 158
access
Routing Table Editor · 117, 118
Access
Change PLC dialog · 62
CX-Net Network Configuration tool · 3
Data Link Editor · 69
Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor component · 47
Edit Project dialog · 63
IO Table component · 17
Memory Card component · 57
PLC Memory component · 7
SYSMAC NET Data Link Editor · 69
Adding a Device · 62
Adding a Local Network · 118
Adding a Remote Network · 119
Additional Features - Routing Table · 120
Appendix A
Network Availability · 125
Appendix B
PLC Memory Areas · 131
Appendix C
Toolbars and Keyboard Shortcuts · 151
Application · 157
B
Baud rate · 157
Bit · 157
C
Checking Data Link Tables · 96
Clear All Memory Areas · 54
Clearing and Filling Data Areas · 11
Clearing PLC Errors · 65
Closing a PLC · 63
Communication Unit Setup · 66
Communications
End connections · 159
Gateway connections · 160
Host Link · 37, 41, 43
Modem · 161
Peripheral Port · 37, 43
Requirements · 2
Testing network connections · 66
Configuring a PLc's System Settings · 64
Controller Link
Network settings · 67
Network setup · 67
Network status · 67
Software switches · 28
Creating a New CX-Server Project · 62
Creating a new Routing Table · 117
Creating and IO Table · 65
CS1-Series PLC Settings · 35
C-Series PLC Settings · 42
CSV format (Unit Status and Error Log) · 66
CSV-format (Data Link Table) · 97
Customer support for CX-Server · 4
CV-Series PLC Settings · 39
CX-Net and CX-Server Projects · 62
CX-Net Network Configuration tool
Access · 3
Access Change PLC dialog · 62
Access Edit Project dialog · 63
Adding a device to a CX-Server project · 62
Adding a PLC to a CX-Server project · 62
Broadcast nodes test · 66
Changing a device in a CX-Server project · 63
Changing a PLC in a CX-Server project · 63
Clearing PLC errors · 65
Closing a PLC · 63
Controller Link settings · 67
Creating a new CX-Server project · 62
Creating an IO table · 65
CX-Server project · 62
CX-Server project devices · 61
Data link tables · See Data link tables
Device information · 64
Device List dialog · 63
Displaying unit status · 65
Dragging device information into a CX-Server project · 64
Editing a CX-Server project · 63
Editing PLC list · 63
Internode Echo-Back test · 66, 159, 160
Introduction · 61
Opening a PLC · 63
Opening an existing CX-Server project · 62
Ping node test · 66
Ping test · 162
PLC settings · 63
Project · 62
Routing tables · See Routing tables
Scanning for connections · 64
Setting the operating mode · 65
Status bar · 61
SYSMAC LINK settings · 66
System settings · 64
Testing network connections · 66
Unit status · 65
User interface · 61
CX-Net Network Configuration Tool · 61
CX-Programmer
System requirements · 2
CX-Server
About · 1, 4, 158
Customer support · 4
Installation · 2
Starting · See Access
CX-Server 1.5 Fearures · 2
CX-Server project
Access Edit Project dialog · 63
Adding a device to a CX-Server project · 62
Adding a PLC to a CX-Server project · 62
Changing a device in a CX-Server project · 63
Changing a PLC in a CX-Server project · 63
Creating a new CX-Server project · 62
Device List dialog · 63
Dragging device information · 64
Editing a CX-Server project · 63
Editing PLC list · 63
Opening an existing CX-Server project · 62
CX-Server project file · 62
CX-Server Software · 1
CX-Server PLC Tools
INDEX – CX-Server – PLC Tools User Manual
D
Data Link · 67
Data link tables
Access · 69
Access to SYSMAC NET Data Link Editor · 69
Common link parameter · 157
Creating a SYSMAC NET data link table · 69
Data Link Editor · 69
Deleting a table · 69
Deleting an item from a SYSMAC NET data link table · 70
Editing a SYSMAC NET data link table · 69
Editing a table · 68
Import tables · 70
Introduction · 62
Logical error checking · 70
Offline Data Link Editor · 69
Offline SYSMAC NET Data Link Editor · 69
Opening a table · 68
Opening an existing SYSMAC NET data link table · 70
Saving a table · 68
Setup · 68
Status bar · 69
SYSMAC NET · 68
SYSMAC NET Data Link Editor · 69
SYSMAC NET table information · 70
Table information · 69
Updating table status · 68
Data Link Tables · 79
Data Trace/Time Chart · 47
Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor component
Access · 47
Bit addresses · 49, 51
Block mode · 51
Close · 47
Colour configuration · 51
Data trace · 47
Display formats · 51
Execute data trace/time chart · 49
Grid · 52
Histogram mode · 51
Importing SYSWIN files · 52
Inserting a TRSM ladder instruction · 48
Introduction · 47
Modes of operation · 48
Open a data trace file · 50
Outline mode · 51
Sampling ranges · 47
Scale · 51
Set trigger condition · 49
Setting a timer interval · 48
Setting conditions · 48
Startus bar · 47
Stop data trace/time chart monitor · 49
Trend graph mode · 51
Trigger conditions · 48
Upload data trace · 49
User interface · 47
Word addresses · 51
Zoom · 51
Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor Component · 47
DDE · 158, 159
Item · 161
Server · 164
Topic · 164
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 168
OMRON
Displaying a Data Trace/Time Chart · 50
Displaying PLC Device Information · 64
Displaying the PLC Unit Status · 65
DLL · 159
Download
IO Table component · 29
PLC Memory component · 9
PLC Setup component · 45
Dragging Device Information into a CX-Server Project · 64
E
Editing a Device List · 63
Editing Data · 8
Editing the Routing Table · 120
Error Checking - Routing Table · 120
Ethernet
Software switches · 27
Excution Controls · 40
F
Force
Bits · 12
Clearing all bits · 13
Copying bits · 13
Deleting all bits · 13
Display status · 13
Hold bits · 39
Scan status · 13
Set value · 12
Updating bits · 13
Forced Settings · 13
G
Glossary of Terms · 157
H
Help · See Online help
Help and how to access it · 3
Help topics · 3
Help topics
Find · 3
Index · 3
Help Topics
Context sensitive help · 4
Host Link
Communications · 37, 41, 43
Hot Swap · 32
I
I/O Table Component · 17
I/O Table Memory Component
CX-Server PLC Tools
INDEX – CX-Server – PLC Tools User Manual
OMRON
Verifying Corract Configuration · 26
Import
Data link tables · 70
SYSWIN data trace/time chart files · 52
Installing CX-Server · 2
IO Table component
Access · 17
Actual IO Table · 17, 157
Allocating slots in a rack · 24
ASCII unit settings · 25
Checking the IO table · 29
Clearing the IO table · 29
Close · 17
Comparing an IO table · 29, 30
Counter unit settings · 25
Creating an IO table · 17, 18, 19, 20, 24, 65
CX-Server IO Table · 17
Deleting an IO table unit · 29
Editing software switches · 27
Editing units · 25
Hot swapping · 32
Interrupt unit settings · 25
Introduction · 17
Multiple units · 21, 23, 25
Numerical control unit settings · 25
Position Controller unit settings · 25
Rack start address setting · 33
Registered IO Table · 17, 163
Remote Terminals · 25
Single units · 21, 23, 25
SIOU units · 17
SIOU/Communications unit settings · 25
Software switches · 26
Software switches, Controller Link · 28
Software switches, data link area settings · 27
Software switches, Ethernet · 27
Software switches, general settings · 27
Software switches, serial communications unit settings · 28
Software switches, SYSMAC LINK · 27, 28
Software switches, SYSMAC NET · 27
Software switches, Sysmac-Bus2 settings · 28
Status bar · 17
Sysmac-Bus Master and Remote Terminal unit settings · 25
Timer unit settings · 25
Transfer from PLC · 29
Transfer to PLC · 29
Unit manufacturing information · 33
Unit settings · 21
Unit setup · 26
Units profile information · 33
Units, SIOU · 17
User interface · 17
Verifying correct IO configuration · 26
IO Table Management · 29
M
Managing the Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor · 49
Manually Setting Data Links · 78
Memory Card component
Access · 57
Compact Flash · 157
Copy · 58
Cut · 58
Deleting a file · 59
EM memory as file memory · 58
Errors · 59
Extended PLC setup files · 59
Formatting prior to use · 57, 58
Introduction · 57
Paste · 58
Properties · 59
Renaming a file · 59
Snapshots · 57
Status bar · 57
Transfer to EM file area · 59
Transfer to memory card · 59
User interface · 57
Viewing a file from the memory card · 57
Memory Card Component · 57
Memory Card Display · 58
Memory Card Operation · 57
Monitor
Address areas · 12
PLC data areas · 10
Monitor Component · 47
Monitoring Data Link Status · 114
N
Network Availability · 125
Network Configuration tool · See CX-Net Network
Configuration tool
O
Online help · 1, 3
Opening a PLC · 63
Opening an Existing CX-Server Project · 62
Opening an existing Routing Table · 117
P
Peripheral Port
Communications · 37, 43
PLC
Access Change PLC dialog · 62
Address enable settings · 41
Addresses · 12
Clearing errors · 65
Closing a PLC · 63
Creating an IO table · 65
Cycle time settings · 43
Data areas · 8
Default settings · 35, 39, 42
Deleting errors · 65
Device information · 64
Dragging into a CX-Server project · 64
Duplex Settings · 38
EM memory as file memory · 40
Error log settings · 40
Error settings · 44, 45
Execution control settings · 40
Execution process processing · 36
Extended setup files · 59
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 169
CX-Server PLC Tools
INDEX – CX-Server – PLC Tools User Manual
Hold settings · 41
Information · 64
Interrupt settings · 43
IO refresh settings · 41
Memory allocation settings · 36
Offline PLC · 63
Online PLC · 63
Opening a PLC · 63
Operating mode · 39, 63
Operating mode, setting · 65
PC communications · 29, 30, 45, 49, 59
PLC Specific Features · 32
Refresh settings · 43
Scanning for connections · 64
Setting the operating mode · 65
Settings · 35, 63
SIOU refresh settings · 37
Startup settings · 35, 39, 42
System settings · 64
Testing network connections · 66
Timing settings · 36, 41
Unit settings · 37
Unit status · 65
PLC Clock tool
Introduction · 71
Setting the time · 71
Synchronise · 71
PLC Clock Tool · 71
PLC Error component
Activating the error log following error detection · 56
Clearing errors · 53, 65
Clearing messages · 54
Clearing the error log · 54
Clock settings · 55
Customising component layout · 55
Deleting errors · 53, 65
Deleting messages · 54
Deleting the error log · 54
Disabling the error log · 55
Displaying the Error Log · 56
Eerror log · 54
Enabling the error log · 55
Error log entry types · 54
Error log settings · 54
Error types · 54
Errors · 53
Introduction · 53
Manual updates to the error log · 55
Messages · 54
Overwriting error log entries · 55
PLC settings · 40
Refreshing the error log · 55
Status bar · 53
Time monitoring settings · 54
User interface · 53
PLC Error Component · 53
PLC Memory · 10
PLC Memory Arears · 131
PLC Memory component
Access · 7
Address area · 12
Clearing and Filling Data Areas · 11
Clearing data areas · 11
Clearing forced bits · 13
Close · 7, 35, 53, 71
Comparing PLC and PC values · 9
Copy · 14
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 170
OMRON
Copying forced bits · 13
Cut · 14
Data areas · 8
Deleting data areas · 11
Deleting forced bits · 13
Deleting rows · 13
Display formats · 8, 11, 12, 15
Displaying forced status · 13
Editing Data · 8
Editing data areas · 8
Filling data areas · 11
Forced settings · 13
Forcing data · 12
Inserting rows · 13
Introduction · 7
Monitoring address areas · 12
Monitoring data areas · 10
Opening files · 14
Paste · 14
Preferences · 15
Print preview · 14
Print setup · 14
Printing data areas · 14
Removing rows · 13
Resize columns · 7
Resize rows · 7
Saving data to a CX-Server project · 14
Saving data to file · 14
Status bar · 7
Transfer from PLC · 8
Transfer to PLC · 9
Updating forced status · 13
User interface · 7
Viewing PLC memory · 7
Zoom · 8
PLC Memory Component · 7
PLC Memory Management · 14
PLC Memory Preferences · 15
PLC Setting - CS1-Series · 35
PLC Settings · 63
PLC Settings - C-Series · 42
PLC Settings - CV-Series · 39
PLC Setup component
Address enable settings · 41
Communications board settings · 43
Comparing PLC settings · 46
Cycle time settings · 43
Default settings · 35, 39, 42
error log settings · 40
Error settings · 44, 45
Execution control settings · 40
Execution process settings · 36
Hold area settings · 41
Host Link Port settings · 37, 41, 43
Interrupt settings · 43
Introduction · 35
IO Refresh settings · 41
Memory allocation settings · 36
Peripheral Port settings · 37, 43
Refresh settings · 43
SIOU refresh settings · 37
Startup settings · 35, 36, 38, 39, 42
Status bar · 35
Timing settings · 36, 41
Transfer from PLC · 45
Transfer to PLC · 45
Unit settings · 37
CX-Server PLC Tools
INDEX – CX-Server – PLC Tools User Manual
OMRON
User interface · 35
Verifying PLC settings · 46
PLC Setup Component · 35
PLCMemory components
PC to PLC communications · 8
Timer/Counter Memory areas · 9
Points
Address · 157
Command modifier · 157
Data location · 158
Groups · 160
IO types · 21, 23, 25
Print
PLC Memory component · 14
Preview PLC Memory component · 14
Setup PLC Memory component · 14
Procedure Through Data Link Startup · 108
R
Rack/Slot Start Address · 33
Racks · 163
Reading and Transferring Data Link Tables · 103
Reading the Data Link Table · 103
Retrieving Data Trace/Time Settings · 50
Routing Table · 67
routing tables
access Routing Table Editor · 117, 118
Routing tables
Adding a Local Network · 118
Adding a Remote Network · 119
Additional Features · 120
Creating a new Routing Table · 117
Editing the Routing Table · 120
Error Checking · 120
Introduction · 61
Opening an existing Table · 117
Table View Screen · 121
The Network View Screen · 120
The Overview Screen · 121
Transferring a Routing table from a PLC · 124
Transferring a Routing table to a PLC · 124
Routing Tables · 117
Sysmac-Bus2 settings · 28
Starting and Stopping Data Links (Including Status Displays) ·
106
Starting CX-Server · See access
Status bar · 4
CX-Net Network Configuration tool · 61
Data Link Editor · 69
Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor component · 47
IO Table component · 17
Memory Card component · 57
PLC Error component · 53
PLC Memory component · 7
PLC Setup component · 35
Symbols · 164
SYSMAC LINK
Network settings · 66
Network setup · 66
Network status · 66
Software switches · 27, 28
SYSMAC LINK Automatic Setup · 111
SYSMAC NET
Access to Data Link Editor · 69
Creating a data link table · 69
Data Link Editor · 69
Data link table information · 70
Data link tables setup · 68
Deleting an item from a data link table · 70
Editing a data link table · 69
Logical error checking · 70
Offline Data Link Editor · 69
Opening an existing data link table · 70
Software switches · 27
System requirements · 2
SYSWIN Data Trace and Time Chart Monitor Files · 52
T
Technical Specification · 1
Testing the Network Connection · 66
Toolbars and Keyboard Shortcuts · 151
Transferring the Data Link Table · 104
U
S
Saving Data Trace Settings · 50
Scanning for PLC Connections · 64
Setting teh PLC Mode · 65
Settings · 36
Slots · 164
Software switches · 26
Controller Link · 28
Data link area settings · 27
Editing · 27
Ethernet · 27
General settings · 27
Serial communications unit settings · 28
SYSMAC LINK · 27, 28
SYSMAC NET · 27
Unit setup · 26, 66
Unit Status/Error Log · 66
Units · 165
Upload
Data Trace/Time Chart Monitor component · 49
IO Table component · 29
PLC Memory component · 8
PLC Setup component · 45
W
Words · 165
CX-Server PLC Tools Page 171
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement